A 1 Sjhs 8

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
(Be sure to read these instructions before use.)
Before using the product, read this and relevant manuals carefully and handle the product correctly with full
attention to safety.
In this manual, SAFETY PRECAUTIONS are classified into 2 levels: "DANGER" and "CAUTION".
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

DANGER death or severe injury.
Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

CAUTION medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.
Under some circumstances, failure to observe the CAUTION level instructions may also lead to serious
results.
Be sure to observe the instructions of both levels to ensure the safety.
Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference and also pass this manual on to the end user.
[DESIGN PRECAUTIONS]
DANGER
Create a safety circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure the whole system will operate
safely even if an external power failure or a programmable controller failure occurs.
Otherwise, incorrect output or malfunction may cause an accident.
(1) For an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit and interlock circuit that is designed for
incompatible actions such as forward/reverse rotation or for damage prevention such as the
upper/lower limit setting in positioning, any of them must be created outside the programmable
controller.
Install the emergency stop switch outsid the controlpanel so that workers can operate it easily.
(2) When the programmable controller detects the following error conditions, it stops the operation
and turn off all the outputs.
• The overcurrent protection device or overvoltage protection device of the power supply
module is activated.
• The programmable controller CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error by the
self-diagnostics function.
In the case of an error of a part such as an I/O control part that cannot be detected by the
programmable controller CPU, all the outputs may turn on.In order to make all machines
operate safely in such a case, set up a fail-safe circuit or a specific mechanism outside the
programmable controller. For a fail-safe circuit example, refer to "LOADING AND
INSTALLATION" in this manual.
(3) Depending on the failure of the output module's relay or transistor, the output status may remain
ON or OFF incorrectly.
For output signals that may lead to a serious accident, create an external monitoring circuit.
A-1
DANGER
If load current more than the rating or overcurrent due to a short circuit in the load has flowed in the
output module for a long time, it may cause a fire and smoke. Provide an external safety device such
as a fuse.
Design a circuit so that the external power will be supplied after power-up of the programmable
controller.
Activating the external power supply prior to the programmable controller may result in an accident
due to incorrect output or malfunction.
For the operation status of each station at a communication error in data link, refer to the respective
data link manual.
The communication error may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
When controlling a running programmable controller (data modification) by connecting a peripheral

device to the CPU module or a PC to a special function module, create an interlock circuit on
sequence programs so that the whole system functions safely all the time.
Also, before performing any other controls (e.g. program modification, operating status change
(status control)), read the manual carefully and ensure the safety.
In these controls, especially the one from an external device to a programmable controller in a
remote location, some programmable controller side problem may not be resolved immediately due
to failure of data communications.
To prevent this, create an interlock circuit on sequence programs and establish corrective
procedures for communication failure between the external device and the programmable controller
CPU.
When setting up the system, do not allow any empty slot on the base unit.
If any slot is left empty, be sure to use a blank cover (A1SG60) or a dummy module (A1SG62) for it.
When using the extension base unit, A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1) or A1S58B(S1), attach the included
dustproof cover to the module in slot 0.
Otherwise, internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an overcurrent or
overvoltage is accidentally applied to the external I/O section.
CAUTION
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit or power lines,
or bring them close to each other.
Keep a distance of 100mm (3.94inch) or more between them.
Failure to do so may cause malfunctions due to noise.
When an output module is used to control the lamp load, heater, solenoid valve, etc., a large current
(ten times larger than the normal one) may flow at the time that the output status changes from OFF
to ON. Take some preventive measures such as replacing the output module with the one of a
suitable current rating.
A-2
[INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the user's manual.
Otherwise, it may cause electric shocks, fires, malfunctions, product deterioration or damage.
Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit and then tighten the module
fixing screw within the specified torque.
When no screw is tightened, even if the module is installed correctly, it may cause malfunctions, a
failure or a drop of the module.
Tightening the screw excessively may damage the screw and/or the module, resulting in a drop of
the module, a short circuit or malfunctions.
Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit or module.
Check for incomplete connection after installing it.
Poor electrical contact may cause incorrect inputs and/or outputs.
Insert the memory cassette and fully press it to the memory cassette connector.
Poor electrical contact may cause malfunctions.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the module.
Failure to do so may damage the module.
Do not directly touch the conductive part or electronic components of the module.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or a failure of the module.
A-3
[WIRING PRECAUTIONS]
DANGER
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage of the product.
Before energizing and operating the system after wiring, be sure to attach the terminal cover
supplied with the product.
Failure to do so may cause an electric shock.
CAUTION
Ground the FG and LG terminals correctly.
Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions.
Wire the module correctly after confirming the rated voltage and terminal layout.
Connecting a power supply of a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause a fire or failure.
Do not connect multiple power supply modules to one module in parallel.

The power supply modules may be heated, resulting in a fire or failure.
Press, crimp or properly solder the connector for external connection with the specified tool.
Incomplete connection may cause a short circuit, fire or malfunctions.
Tighten terminal screws within the specified torque range.

If the screw is too loose, it may cause a short circuit, fire or malfunctions.
Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Failure to do so may cause a fire, failure or malfunctions.
Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use.

Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel through a
distribution terminal block.
Furthermore, the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be performed by a
maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection.
(For the wiring methods, refer to Section 8.7.)
A-4
[STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS]
DANGER
Do not touch any terminal during power distribution.
Doing so may cause an electric shock.
Properly connect batteries.

Do not charge, disassemble, heat or throw them into the fire and do not make them short-circuited
and soldered.
Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic heat, burst and/or
ignition.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before cleaning or
retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock.
If they are too loose, it may cause a short circuit or malfunctions.
A-5
CAUTION
When performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output or operating
status change) by connecting a peripheral device to the running CPU module, read the manual
carefully and ensure the safety.
Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents.
Do not disassemble or modify each of modules.

Doing so may cause failure, malfunctions, personal injuries and/or a fire.
When using a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone, keep a distance of 25cm
(9.84inch) or more from the programmable controller in all directions.
Failure to do so may cause malfunctions.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or
removing the module.
Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module.
Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery.

Doing so may damage the battery, resulting in electrolyte spillage inside the battery.
If any impact has been applied, discard the battery and never use it.
Do not mount/remove the module onto/from base unit more than 50 times (IEC61131-2-compliant),
after the first use of the product.
Before handling modules, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the
human body.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module.
A-6
[DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
When disposing of the product, treat it as an industrial waste.
When disposing of batteries, separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations.
(For details of the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Appendix 6.)
[TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS]
CAUTION
When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to treat them based on the transportation regulations.
(Refer to Appendix 5 for details of the relevant models.)
A-7
Revision
*The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date *Manual Number Revision
May., 1997 IB(NA)66779-A First edition
Nov., 1997 IB(NA)66779-B Correction
Contents, Related manuals, Section 1.1, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, Section 2.2, 2.3,
Chapter 3, Section 4.1.6, Section 5.1, 5.2, Section 6.1.2, Section 8.7.1, 8.7.2,
Section 9.1.3, Section 11.3.1, Appendix 1, 1.1, Appendix 3.1, 3.2, Appendix 5.
Apr., 1998 IB(NA)-66779-C Correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Contents, Section 1.1, Section 2.2, 2.3, Section 4.1,
4.1.7, 4.1.8, 4.1.9, 4.4.3, Section 6.1.3, Section 7.1.4, Section 8.7.1, Section
9.2.1, 9.2.2, Section 11.3.1, Appendix 1, 1.1, Appendix 3.1, 3.2, 3.3.3.
Aug., 1998 IB(NA)-66779-D Correction
Section 2.2.1, 2.3, Section 4.1, Section 9.1.2.7, 9.1.2.9 Section 11.2.4, Appendix
2.2, 3.3.5
Nov., 1998 IB(NA)-66779-E Addition of module
A1SJHCPU-S8
Dec., 2002 IB(NA)-66779-F Equivalent to the Japanese version F
Correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 1.1, 1.2, Section 2.1.1, 2.1.2, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 2.3,
Chapter 3, Section 4.1.1, 4.1.7, Section 5.1, 5.2, Section 6.1.3, Section 7.1.1,
Section 9.1.4, Chapter 10, Section 11.1.3, Appendix 2.1, 2.2, Appendix 4
Dec., 2003 IB(NA)-66779-G Addition of module
A1SY42P
Correction
Section 2.2.1, 2.3, Section 7.1.1, 7.1.4, 7.2.1, Section 8.4.1, 8.8, Section 9.1.4,
Section 11.3.1, Appendix 2.1
Addition
Appendix 5
Oct., 2006 IB(NA)-66779-H Correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Section 2.2.1, 2.3, Chapter 3, Section 4.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3,
4.1.4, 4.1.7, 4.2, 4.3, 4.4.1, 4.4.3, 4.4.4, Section 5.1, 5.2, Section 6.1.2, 6.1.3, 6.2,
Section 7.1.1, 7.1.3, Section 8.1, 8.3, 8.4.1, 8.4.2, 8.5, 8.7.1, 8.7.2, 8.8, Chapter
9, Section 9.1.3, 9.2.6, Chapter 10, Section 10.2, 10.3.2, Section 11.2.8, 11.3.2,
11.4.1, 11.4.2, Appendix 2.1, 2.2, Appendix 4.5.1, WARRANTY
Addition
USER PRECAUTONS, Section 7.2.2, Section 11.2.9, 11.3.1
A-8
Print Date *Manual Number Revision
May, 2007 IB(NA)-66779-I Correction
Section 2.3, 8.7.1, 8.7.2, 9.1.3, 9.2.7, 10.3.1, 11.4.2
Addition
Section 9.1.7
Jul., 2007 IB(NA)-66779-J Correction
Section 6.2, Appendix 4.4.1, Appendix 4.4.3, Appendix 4.4.4, Appendix 4.4.5,
Appendix 4.4.8, Appendix 4.4.9, Appendix 4.4.10
Sep., 2008 IB(NA)-66779-K Correction
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS, Chapter 1, Section 2.2.2, 2.3, 2.4, Chapter 3,
Section 4.1, 4.1.1, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.1.4, 4.1.5, 4.3, 4.4, 5.1, 8.1, 8.2, 8.3, 8.4.1,
8.4.2, 8.7.1, 8.7.2, 8.8, 9.1, 9.1.1, 9.1.2, 9.1.3, 9.2, 9.2.1, 9.2.2, 9.2.3, 9.2.4, 9.2.5,
9.2.6, 9.2.7, Chapter 10, Section 10.3.1, 10.3.2, 11.1, 11.2.3, 11.3, 11.4.1, 11.2.8,
Appendix 1, Appendix2.2
Addition
Appendix 6, Appendix 6.1, Appendix 6.2
Japanese Manual Version SH-3635-L

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor dose it confer any patent
licenses.Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights
which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
1997 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
A-9
Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi programmable logic controller MELSEC-A Series.
Prior to use, please read this manual thoroughly to fully understand the functions.
Please hand in a copy of this manual to the end user.
Table of Contents
1 OVERVIEW 1 - 1 to 1 - 4
1.1 Features ........................................................................................................................................1 - 2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 - 1 to 2 - 30
2.1 Overall Configuration.....................................................................................................................2 - 1
2.1.1 Overall configuration of AnSHCPU .......................................................................................2 - 1
2.1.2 Overall configuration of A1SJHCPU(S8)...............................................................................2 - 3
2.2 Precautions when Configuring the System ...................................................................................2 - 5
2.2.1 Hardware...............................................................................................................................2 - 5
2.2.2 Software package .................................................................................................................2 - 9
2.3 System Equipment ......................................................................................................................2 - 11
2.4 System Configuration Overview ..................................................................................................2 - 26
3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 - 1 to 3 - 1
4 CPU MODULE 4 - 1 to 4 - 29
4.1 Performance Specifications...........................................................................................................4 - 1
4.1.1 Overview of operation processing.........................................................................................4 - 4
4.1.2 Operation processing of RUN, STOP and PAUSE ...............................................................4 - 7
4.1.3 Operation processing upon instantaneous power failure ......................................................4 - 9
4.1.4 Self-diagnostics function .....................................................................................................4 - 10
4.1.5 Device list............................................................................................................................4 - 13
4.2 Parameter Setting Ranges ..........................................................................................................4 - 15
4.2.1 List of parameter setting range ...........................................................................................4 - 15
4.2.2 Memory capacity setting (for main program, file register, comment, etc.) ..........................4 - 17
4.3 Function List ................................................................................................................................4 - 19
4.4 Handling Precautions ..................................................................................................................4 - 21
4.5 Part Names .................................................................................................................................4 - 22
4.5.1 Parts names of the A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU(S1), A1SJHCPU (S8)......................................4 - 22
4.5.2 Setting of I/O control mode switching switch.......................................................................4 - 26
4.5.3 Settings for memory write protect switch ............................................................................4 - 27
4.5.4 Latch clear operation...........................................................................................................4 - 29
5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 - 1 to 5 - 6

5.1 Specifications ................................................................................................................................5 - 1
5.1.1 Power supply module selection.............................................................................................5 - 4
5.2 Part Names ...................................................................................................................................5 - 5
A - 10
6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 - 1 to 6 - 10
6.1 Specifications ................................................................................................................................6 - 1
6.1.1 Base unit specifications.........................................................................................................6 - 1
6.1.2 Extension cable specifications ..............................................................................................6 - 2
6.1.3 Application standards of extension base units (A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B,
A55B, A58B) .........................................................................................................................6 - 3
6.2 Part Names ...................................................................................................................................6 - 7
6.3 Installation and Removal of DIN Rail.............................................................................................6 - 9
7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY 7 - 1 to 7 - 8

7.1 Memory Cassette ..........................................................................................................................7 - 1
7.1.1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................7 - 1
7.1.2 Handling precautions ............................................................................................................7 - 2
7.1.3 Installation and removal of memory cassette........................................................................7 - 3
7.1.4 Writing a sequence program to a memory cassette..............................................................7 - 5
7.1.5 Memory protection setting of A2SNMCA-30KE ....................................................................7 - 6
7.2 Battery ...........................................................................................................................................7 - 7
7.2.1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................7 - 7
7.2.2 Handling precautions ............................................................................................................7 - 7
7.2.3 Battery installation.................................................................................................................7 - 8
8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 8 - 1 to 8 - 23

8.1 Fail-Safe Circuit Concept ..............................................................................................................8 - 1
8.2 Installation Environment ................................................................................................................8 - 6
8.3 Calculation Method of Heat Amount Generated by the PLC.........................................................8 - 7
8.4 Installing the Base Units................................................................................................................8 - 9
8.4.1 Precautions when installing programmable controller...........................................................8 - 9
8.4.2 Installation ...........................................................................................................................8 - 10
8.5 Installation and Removal of the Base Units.................................................................................8 - 11
8.6 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover........................................................................8 - 14
8.7 Wiring ..........................................................................................................................................8 - 16
8.7.1 Wiring instructions...............................................................................................................8 - 16
8.7.2 Wiring to module terminals..................................................................................................8 - 21
8.8 Precautions when Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ....................................8 - 23
9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 - 1 to 9 - 13

9.1 Requirements for Compliance with EMC Directives......................................................................9 - 1
9.1.1 EMC standards .....................................................................................................................9 - 1
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC directive .............................................................................9 - 2
9.1.3 Cables ...................................................................................................................................9 - 3
9.1.4 Power supply module............................................................................................................9 - 8
9.1.5 Ferrite core............................................................................................................................9 - 8
9.1.6 Noise filter (power supply line filter) ......................................................................................9 - 9
9.1.7 Power line for external power supply terminal ......................................................................9 - 9
9.2 Requirements for Compliance with Low Voltage Directives........................................................9 - 10
A - 11
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller .................................9 - 10
9.2.2 Precautions when using the MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller......................9 - 10
9.2.3 Power supply.......................................................................................................................9 - 11
9.2.4 Control panel.......................................................................................................................9 - 12
9.2.5 Module installation ..............................................................................................................9 - 13
9.2.6 Grounding ...........................................................................................................................9 - 13
9.2.7 External wiring.....................................................................................................................9 - 13
10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 - 1 to 10 - 8

10.1 Daily Inspection ...........................................................................................................................10 - 2
10.2 Periodic Inspection ......................................................................................................................10 - 3
10.3 Battery Replacement...................................................................................................................10 - 4
10.3.1 Battery life ...........................................................................................................................10 - 4
10.3.2 Battery replacement procedure...........................................................................................10 - 8
11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 - 1 to 11 - 22
11.1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting...............................................................................................11 - 1
11.2 Troubleshooting...........................................................................................................................11 - 2
11.2.1 Troubleshooting procedure .................................................................................................11 - 2
11.2.2 Flow for actions when the "POWER" LED is turned OFF ...................................................11 - 3
11.2.3 Flow for actions when the "RUN" LED is turned OFF .........................................................11 - 4
11.2.4 Flow for actions when the "RUN" LED is flickering .............................................................11 - 5
11.2.5 Flow for actions when the "ERROR" LED is turned ON......................................................11 - 6
11.2.6 Flow for actions when the "ERROR" LED is flickering ........................................................11 - 7
11.2.7 Flow for actions when the output module's output load does not turn ON ..........................11 - 8
11.2.8 Flow for actions when the program cannot be written.........................................................11 - 9
11.2.9 Flow for actions when the CPU module is not started up .................................................11 - 10
11.3 Error Code List ..........................................................................................................................11 - 11
11.3.1 Procedure to read an error code .......................................................................................11 - 11
11.3.2 AnSHCPU error code list ..................................................................................................11 - 12
11.4 Fault Examples with I/O Modules..............................................................................................11 - 17
11.4.1 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions......................................................11 - 17
11.4.2 Faults in the output circuit .................................................................................................11 - 19
APPENDIX Appendix - 1 to Appendix - 57

Appendix 1 Instruction List .............................................................................................................. App - 1
Appendix 1.1 Precautions for write during RUN of a dedicated instruction .............................. App - 7
Appendix 2 LISTS OF SPECIAL RELAYS AND SPECIAL REGISTERS ...................................... App - 8
Appendix 2.1 List of Special Relays......................................................................................... App - 8
Appendix 2.2 Special Registers ............................................................................................. App - 20
Appendix 3 Precautions when Replacing AnSCPU with AnSHCPU............................................. App - 39
Appendix 3.1 Differences between A1SHCPU and A1SCPU................................................. App - 39
Appendix 3.2 Differences between A2SHCPU(S1) and A2SCPU .......................................... App - 40
Appendix 3.3 Replacement precautions ................................................................................. App - 40
Appendix 3.3.1 PLC type setting ........................................................................................ App - 40
Appendix 3.3.2 Precautions when performing ROM partition............................................. App - 40
A - 12
Appendix 3.3.3 Precautions when utilizing sequence programs ........................................ App - 41
Appendix 3.3.4 Checking the influence of the increased instruction processing speed on the
system ....................................................................................................... App - 41
Appendix 3.3.5 Handling conventional memory cassettes ................................................. App - 42
Appendix 3.3.6 Replacing the A2SMCA-14KP (when A2SCPU + A2SMCA-14KP has been used)
................................................................................................................... App - 42
Appendix 3.3.7 Restrictions on microcomputer programs .................................................. App - 42
Appendix 4 External Dimensions .................................................................................................. App - 43
Appendix 4.1 CPU module...................................................................................................... App - 43
Appendix 4.1.1 A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU(S1) module ........................................................... App - 43
Appendix 4.1.2 A1SJHCPU module ................................................................................... App - 43
Appendix 4.1.3 A1SJHCPU-S8 module.............................................................................. App - 44
Appendix 4.2 A1S61PN, A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules .............................. App - 45
Appendix 4.3 Main base unit................................................................................................... App - 46
Appendix 4.3.1 A1S32B main base unit ............................................................................. App - 46
Appendix 4.4 Extension base unit........................................................................................... App - 48
Appendix 4.4.1 A1S65B extension base unit...................................................................... App - 48
Appendix 4.4.6 A1S65B-S1 extension base unit ................................................................ App - 50
Appendix 4.5 Memory cassette............................................................................................... App - 53
Appendix 4.5.1 AnSNMCA-[ ] memory cassette................................................................. App - 53
Appendix 4.6 Memory write adapter ....................................................................................... App - 53
Appendix 4.6.1 A6WA-28P memory write adapter ............................................................. App - 53
Appendix 5 Transportation Precautions ........................................................................................ App - 54
Appendix 5.1 Relevant models ............................................................................................... App - 54
Appendix 5.2 Transportation Guidelines................................................................................. App - 55
Appendix 6 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Countries ................ App - 56
Appendix 6.1 Disposal precautions......................................................................................... App - 56
Appendix 6.2 Exportation precautions .................................................................................... App - 57
INDEX Index - 1 to Index - 3
A - 13
About This Manual
The following manuals are related to this product.
Related manuals
Manual No.
Manual Name
(Model Code)
ACPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Fundamentals)
IB-66249
Describes programming methods necessary for creating programs, device names, parame-
(13J740)
ters, program types, memory area configuration, and so on. (Sold separately)
ACPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
IB-66250
Describes how to use the sequence instruction, basic instructions, applied instructions and
(13J741)
microcomputer programs. (Sold separately)
AnSHCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) Programming Manual (Dedicated Instructions)
IB-66251
Describes instructions that have been expanded for AnSHCPU
(13J742)
(Sold separately)
AnS Module type I/O User's Manual
IB-66541
Describes the specification of the compact building block type I/O module.
(13JE81)
(Sold separately)
A - 14
USER PRECAUTIONS
Precautions when using the AnS series
For a new CPU module, which has never used before, the contents of built-in RAM and
device data are undefined.
Make sure to clear the built-in RAM memory (PLC memory all clear) in the CPU module by
peripheral devices and operate latch clear by RUN/STOP key switches.
Precautions for battery
(1) The operation after a battery is unmounted and the programmable controller is stored.
When reoperating after a battery is uncounted and the programmable controller is
stored, the contents of built-in RAM and device data may be undefined.
For this reason, make sure to clear the built-in RAM memory (PLC memory all clear) in
the CPU module by peripheral devices and operate latch clear by RUN/STOP key
switches before start the operation again.*
After the built-in RAM clear and latch clear of the CPU module, write the backed-up
memory contents to the CPU module before saving.
(2) The operation after excess of a battery life

If a battery exceeded its guaranteed life is stored and reoperated, the contents of built-in
RAM and device data may be undefined.
For this reason, make sure to clear the built-in RAM memory (PLC memory all clear) in
the CPU module by peripheral devices and operate latch clear by RUN/STOP key
switches before start the operation again.*
After the built-in RAM clear and latch clear of the CPU module, write the backed-up
memory contents to the CPU module before saving.
POINT
Make sure to back up each memory contents before storing the programmable
controller.
* Refer to the following manuals for details of built-in RAM clear (PLC memory all clear) by periph-
eral devices.
GX Developer Operating Manual
A6GPP/A6PHP Operating Manual
SW IVD-GPPA Operating Manual
Refer to Section 4.5 for latch clear operation by RUN/STOP key switch of the CPU module.
A - 15
1. OVERVIEW
1 OVERVIEW
This user's manual describes the functions, specification, and handling of the A1SJHCPU
general purpose programmable controller (abbreviated as A1SJHCPU from here on),
A1SJHCPU-S8 general purpose programmable controller (abbreviated as A1SJHCPU-
S8), A1SHCPU general purpose PLC (abbreviated as A1SHCPU), A2SHCPU general
purpose PLC (abbreviated as A2SHCPU), and A2SHCPU-S1 general purpose PLC
(abbreviated as A2SHCPU-S1).
A1SHCPU and A1SJHCPU are grouped as A1SHCPU, unless there is necessity to

identify each model.
Also, A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU and A2SHCPU-S1 are grouped as AnSHCPU, unless there
is necessity to identify each model.
The AnSHCPU is a compact-type building block programmable controller. The model is

one third the size of the conventional building block type programmable controller, and
allows easy operation in spite of its small size.
Sequence programs that have been created for the existing A0J2CPU, A0J2HCPU and
A NCPU models can be used by changing the CPU module type specification for the
program. Moreover, since modules for use with A NCPU can be used by installing them
on an extension base unit for A NCPU use, it is possible to extend the functions of an
AnSCPU.
This user's manual refers to peripheral devices by using the following abbreviations.
A6GPP, A6PHP, PC/AT (started up with SW IVD-GPPA)

......................................................... Abbreviated as "GPP function".
A7PUS, A8PUE .............................. Abbreviated as "PU".
1-1
1. OVERVIEW
1.1 Features
(1) High-speed operation processing speed

Compared to the conventional A1SCPU, the A1SHCPU is three times and A2SHCPU
(S1) is four times faster in the operation processing speed, respectively.
Item A1SHCPU A2SHCPU(S1) A1SCPU
Operation processing speed *1 0.33 s 0.25 s 1 s
*1 I/O processing: Refresh and LD instruction
(2) Addition of new dedicated instructions

The CC-Link dedicated instructions (8 instructions) have been added, making the
operation even easier.
(3) Increased number of I/O device points

The actual number of I/O points is the same as the AnS series, but each CPU has
2048 points (X/Y0 to X/Y7FF) of I/O devices.
The added I/O device can be used as the MELSECNET (/B), MELSECNET/MINI-S3,
or CC-Link.
(4) Increased file register R capacity

The capacity is now max. 8192 points (R0 to R8191), which doubled the AnS series'
4096 points (R0 to R4095).
(5) Increased memory capacity (Increased number of comment points)

The A1SHCPU has 64 k bytes, which doubled the A1SCPU's 32 k bytes.
This increased the number of comment points stored in the CPU module 3648 points
in comparison to the 1600 points in A1SCPU.
(6) Full compatibility with A1S(S1)/A2SCPU(S1)

Because there is full compatibility of the functions and instructions with A1S(S1)/
A2SCPU(S1), all software packages can be used.
In addition, power supply module, base unit, and I/O modules can be used.
(7) Compact size

The appearance of the AnSHCPU system with one power supply module, one CPU,
and eight 16-point I/O modules for use with AnS mounted to the main base unit are:
430mm (16.9in.) (W); 130mm (5.12in.) (H); and 110mm (4.33in.) (D).
(8) Max. 8 k/14 k steps of program

An A1SHCPU allows the creation of a sequence program up to 8k steps, an
A2SHCPU(S1) allows up to 14k steps.
In addition, microcomputer programs and utility programs created by the user can be
used.
1-2
1. OVERVIEW
(9) SFC language compatible

An AnSCPU contains a microcomputer program area, so an SFC program can be
used.
(10) Two extension connectors, on the right and left sides. (A1SHCPU,A2SHCPU(S1))
In order to facilitate wiring wherever the extension base unit is installed, extension
connectors are provided at both left and right sides of the AnSHCPU and extension
cables that suit the requirements imposed by different mounting locations are
available.
* A1SJHCPU(S8) on the right side only
(11) Use either screws or DIN rail for panel installations

The AnS base unit is provided both with screw holes and, on its rear face, the fixture
for mounting it to a DIN rail.
(12) Easy-to-see terminal block symbol sheet

• A terminal block symbol sheet is attached to the front of AnS I/O modules.
AnSHCPU writes I/O device numbers, connector numbers, etc. on one side of the
sheet.
• Terminal symbols for 16 I/O signals can be written on the other side.
(13) A N, A A-series I/O module and special function module compatible

By connecting an A N, A A-series extension base unit, A N, A A I/O
modules or special function modules can be used.
(14) Same programming environment as other MELSEC-A CPU modules

A sequence program can be created using the peripheral device currently used for
other MELSEC-A CPU modules. For details on the applicable peripheral devices,
refer to Section 2.2 "Precautions when Configuring the System".
1-3
1. OVERVIEW
MEMO
1-4
2. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the applicable system configurations, cautions on configuring a
system, and component devices of the AnSHCPU.
2.1 Overall Configuration
2.1.1 Overall configuration of AnSHCPU
The following figure shows configurations of an AnSHCPU stand-alone system and a

peripheral device.
(To peripheral devices)
ROM cassette A1SHCPU A2SHCPU(S1) ROM cassette

2
(A1SNMCA-8KP with EP-ROM) (A2SNMCA-30KE with E PROM)
(A1SNMCA- KE with E2PROM)
Battery (A6BAT)
Main base(A1S3 B) Power supply module

Input module
Output module
Special function module
Extension cable (A1SC0 NB) Extension cable (A1SC NB)

[Building-block type]
Power supply module Extension base Extension base

Input module (A5 B) (A1S5 B(S1))
Output module : without a power supply module : without a power supply module
(A6 B) (A1S6 B(S1))
: with a power supply module : with a power supply module
2-1
ROM writer *
To CPU module AC30R4

AC300R4
cable
A6PHP A6WU
AC03WU
Plasma hand-held P-ROM writer
graphic programmer cable
module
EP-ROM write adapter ROM cassette

(A6WA-28P) (A1SNMCA-8KP)
Printer
A6GPP intelligent AC30R2 A7NPR-S1,
GPP K6PR-K,
cable General-
purpose printer

A7PUS
programming unit
AC30R4-PUS
cable
A8PUE
programming unit
AC20R4-A8PU
cable
RS-232C RS-422 IBM-PC/AT-compatible

converter personal computer
AC30R4-PUS A6DU-B
cable data access module
2-2
2.1.2 Overall configuration of A1SJHCPU(S8)
The following figure shows configurations of a A1SJHCPU(S8) stand-alone system and

peripheral device.
A1SJHCPU(S8)
(To peripheral device)
Battery (A6BAT)
Thin type I/O module (A1SJ-56 )
ROM cassette
A1SNMCA-8KP
with EP-ROM
A1SNMCA- KE Input module (A1SX )

2
with E PROM
Extension cable (A1SC B)
Output module (A1SY )
Extension base Special function module

(A1S5 B(S1))
:Without a power supply module
(A1S6 B(S1))
:With a power supply module
Power supply module (A1S6 P)
Extension cable (A1SC05NB)

[Building block type]
Input module (AX ) Output module (AY ) Fuse
Extension base
(A5 B)
:Without a power supply module
(A6 B)
Power supply module (A6 P) Special function module
:With a power supply module
2-3
ROM writer*
(To A1SJHCPU(S8)) AC30R4

AC300R4
cable
A6PHP A6WU
AC03WU
Plasma hand-held P-ROM writer
graphic programmer cable module
EP-ROM write ROM cassette

adapter (A1SNMCA-8KP)
(A6WA-28P)
Printer
A7NPR-S1,
A6GPP AC30R2 K6PR-K,
intelligent GPP general-purpose
cable
printer

A7PUS
programming module
AC30R4-PUS
cable
A8PUE
programming module
AC20R4-A8PU
cable
*1, *2
*1: Refer to SW0IX-GPPAE Software
RS-232C RS-422 IBM PC/AT or
Package Operating Manual or the
100% compatible
conerter MELSEC-MEDOC Operating Manual for
connectable cables and devices.
AC30R4-PUS A6DU-B
*2: IBM is a registered trademark of the
cable data access module
International Buisiness Machines Corporation.
2-4
2.2 Precautions when Configuring the System
The hardware and software packages which can be used for the CPU module are
described.
2.2.1 Hardware
(1) I/O module

All the building-block-type I/O modules for A N and A A can be used by installing
them to the extension base module of A5 B/A6 B.
2-5
(2) Special function module

(a) Special function modules for A N and A A can be used by installing them in
the extension base of A5 B/A6 B.
(b) Installation count of the following modules are limited of the special function
modules.
AD51H-S3 AJ71C22-S1
AJ71UC24 AJ71E71N-B2
AJ71E71N-B5 AJ71E71N-T
AJ71C23-S3 AD22-S1
AJ61BT11 (Only when the intelligent mode is used.)
GOT-A900 Series (Only when the bus connection is
used.)*1
GOT1000 Series (Only when the bus connection is Up to 2 modules in total can be installed.
used.)*1
A1SJ71UC24-R2(PRF/R4)
A1SJ71E71N-B2
A1SJ71E71N-B5T
A1SD51S A1SD21-S1
A1SJ61BT11 (Only when the intelligent mode is
used.)
AI61(S1)
Only one module can be installed.
A1SI61
AJ71AP21(S3) AJ71AR21
AJ71AT21B
A1SJ71AP21(S3) A1SJ71AR21
A1SJ71AT21B
AJ71LP21(G/GE) AJ71BR11
AJ71LR21
A1SJ71LP21(GE) A1SJ71BR11
A1SJ71LR21
AJ71PT32-S3 (Only when the extension mode is
used.)
AJ71T32-S3 (Only when the extension mode is
used.)
A1SJ71PT32-S3 (Only when the extension mode is
used.)
A1SJ71T32-S3 (Only when the extension mode is
used.)
*1 Refer to the following manual for the GOT model names.
GOT-A900 Series User's Manual (GT Work2 Version2/GT Designer2 Version2 Compatible
Connection System Manual)
GOT1000 Series Connection Manual
2-6
POINT
When the dedicated instruction for MITSUBISHI

CPU UNIT
the CC-Link is used, use the master MODEL A2USHCPU-S1
MAX 30kSTEP
module marked "9707 B" or later in DATE 9707 B
the DATE column of the rated plate.
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BD992D008H38
Function version
Date of manufacture
(3) Peripheral device

(a) Precautions when using an A6WU P-ROM writer
1) When using an A1SHCPU
Use an A6WU P-ROM writer module whose software version is E or later.
(b) The A6WU P-ROM writer module cannot be installed with add-on system, which
is installed directly in the AnSHCPU.
Only hand-held system, which is installed using cables, is possible.
(c) Among the programming modules (A7PUS and A8PUE), only the A7PUS can be
installed with add-on system.
Other models (A8PUE) can be installed with hand-held system, which is
connected with cables.
2-7
(4) EP-ROM memory cassette ROM partition

Partitioning the EP-ROM memory cassette with an A6GPP (SW4GP-GPPA)/A6WU
requires a memory write adapter (optional).
The following shows the valid combinations of memory cassette and memory write
adapter:
Memory Cassette
CPU Model Memory Write Adapter Model
Model Capacity
A1SHCPU A1SNMCA-8KP 32k bytes
A6WA-28P
A1SJHCPU(S8) A1SNMCA-8KP 32k bytes
(5) Program write during operation with E2PROM

(a) When an operation is executed using an E2PROM, write during RUN is not
possible. If write during RUN is executed, the following messages are displayed
on the peripheral devices:
For SW3GP-GPPA: "PLC COMMUNICATIONS ERROR : ERROR
CODE = 19"
For SW0RX-GPPA: "PLC COMMUNICATIONS ERROR :ERROR
CODE = 19"
For A7PUS: "PLC NOT RESPOND"
(b) The writing of the program cannot be executed from the computer link module or
from a peripheral device connected to other stations on the MELSECNET.
Write programs from peripheral devices connected to the AnSHCPU's RS-422.
2-8
2.2.2 Software package
(1) GPP function software packages and model name setting at the start-up
(a) For AnSHCPU start-up, use the PLC model "A3".
(b) Perform the PLC type setting as shown below when using conventional
peripheral devices.
Programmable controller CPU
Peripheral Software Package for System Model for Set-up
Remark
Device Start-up A1SJH
A2SH A2SH-S1
/A1SH
IBM PC/AT SW IVD-GPPA*
MELSEC MEDOC A3* A3 A3
MELSEC MEDOC plus
A1SJH/
GX Developer A2SH A2SH-S1
A1SH
A6PHP Writing on the ROM

SW3GP-GPPA
A3 is not allowed.
SW4GP-GPPA
A3* A3
A6GPP SW3-GPPA Writing on the ROM
A3
SW3GP-GPPA is not allowed.
SW4GP-GPPA
*Select the model names according to the software package versions as shown below:
Model Name
Type For ROM Writing For Programming
Select "A0J2H" Select "A1S" Select "A1SH" Select "A3" Select "A1SH"
SW4GP-GPPA Q or earlier R or later All versions
SW3RXV-GPPA 30D or earlier 40E or later 30D or earlier 40E or later
SW3NX-GPPA 60G or earlier 70H or later 60G or earlier 70H or later
SW3IVD-GPPA 60G or earlier 70H or later 60G or earlier 70H or later
2-9
POINT
(1) Old software packages other than SW3-GPPA, SW3GP-GPPA, and SW4GP-
GPPA cannot be used as the software package for system start-up for
A6GPP/A6PHP.
(2) Take caution when using a software version that selects "A0J2H" or "A1S" for
ROM writing, since the file register area of 8k points is reduced to 4k points.
To measure this, use a software package for which A1SJH/A1SH can be
selected.
(2) Utility package

(a) The following shows the applicable utility packages:
SW0GHP-UTLPC-FN1 SW0GHP-UTLPC-PID SW0GHP-UTLP-FD1
SW0GHP-UTLPC-FN0 SW0C-UTLP-FN0 SW1GP-AD57P
SW0-AD57P
[1] Select "A3CPU" when a SW0GHP-UTLPC-FN1 or a SW0GHP-UTLP-
FD1 is started up.
[2] If both a SW1GP-AD57P and another utility package are used in
combination, specify "AD57P-COM" as the file name.
(b) The following shows the inapplicable utility package model:

SW0-SAPA(MELSAP)
2 - 10
2.3 System Equipment
The following shows the system equipment (modules and peripheral devices) that can be
used in an AnS system.
(1) AnS series modules
Number of occupied points Current

(points) Consumption
Product Name Model Name Description Remark
[I/O Assignment
Module Type] 5VDC(A) 24VDC(A)
Number of I/O points: 256, memory capacity: 64k

A1SJHCPU bytes, – 0.30 –
Number of I/O slots: 5

A1SJHCPU
bytes, – 0.30 –
(S8)
Number of I/O slots: 8
Built-in RAM
CPU module
Number of I/O points: 256, memory capacity: 64k memory
A1SHCPU – 0.30 –
bytes,

A2SHCPU – 0.40 –
bytes
A2SHCPU- Number of I/O points: 1024, memory capacity: 192k

– 0.40 –
S1 bytes
A1S61PN 5VDC, 5A Installed in the

100/200VAC
power supply slot
Power supply input
A1S62PN 5VDC, 3A/24VDC, 0.6A – – – of the main base
module
and extension
A1S63P 5VDC, 5A 24VDC input base.
2 - 11

[I/O Assignment
A1SX10 16-point 100 to 120 VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX10EU 16-point 100 to 120VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX20 16-point 200 to 240VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX20EU 16-point 200 to 240VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX30 16-point 12/24VDC, 12/24VAC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX40 16-point 12/24VDC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX40-S1 16-point 24VDC input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
Input module A1SX41-S2 32-point 24VDC input module 32 [32 input points] 0.08 –
A1SX71 32-point 5/12/24VDC input module 32 [32 input points] 0.075 –
A1SX80 16-point 12/24VDC sink/source input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX80-S1 16-point 24VDC sink/source input module 16 [16 input points] 0.05 –
A1SX81 32-point 12/24VDC sink/source input module 16 [16 input points] 0.08 –
*1:0.08A is shown on the rating plate of the module.
2 - 12

[I/O Assignment
A1SY10 16-point relay contact output module (2A) 16 [16 output points] 0.12 0.09
A1SY10EU 16-point relay contact output module (2A) 16 [16 output points] 0.12 0.10
A1SY14EU 12-point relay contact output module (2A) 16 [16 output points] 0.12 0.10
8-point relay contact output module (2A) for

A1SY18A 16 [16 output points] 0.24 0.075
independent contacts
8-point relay contact output module (2A) for

A1SY18AEU 16 [16 output points] 0.24 0.075
independent contacts
(200VAC)
A1SY22 16-point triac output module (0.6A) 16 [16 output points] 0.27
0.002
8-point triac output module (1A)

A1SY28A 16 [16 output points] 0.13 –
All points independent
16-point 12/24VDC transistor output module

A1SY40 16 [16 output points] 0.27 0.008
(0.1A) sink type
16-point 12/24VDC transistor output module (0.1A)

A1SY40P 16 [16 output points] 0.079*2 0.011
sink type

(0.1A) sink type

A1SY41P 32 [32 output points] 0.141*3 0.012
Output module sink type

(0.1A) sink type

(0.5A) sink type
16-point 24VDC transistor output module

(2A) sink type

A1SY60E 16 [16 output points] 0.20 0.01
(2A) source type
8-point 5/12/24/48VDC
A1SY68A transistor output module (2A) sink/source type 16 [16 output points] 0.11 –
All points independent

(0.016A) sink type

(0.8A) source type

(0.1A) source type

(0.1A) source type

2 - 13

[I/O Assignment
32-point 12/24VDC input module

A1SH42 32-point 12/24VDC transistor output module 32 [32 output points] 0.50 0.008
(0.1A) sink type
32-point 12/24VDC input module

A1SH42P 32-point 12/24VDC transistor output module 32 [32 output points] 0.13 0.012
(0.1A) sink type
32-point 24VDC input module

A1SH42-S1 32-point 12/24VDC transistor output module 32 [32 output points] 0.50 0.008
I/O hybrid
(0.1A) sink type
module

A1SH42P-S1 32-point 12/24VDC transistor output module 32 [32 output points] 0.13 0.012
(0.1A) sink type

A1SX48Y18 16 [16 output points] 0.085*4 0.045
8-point relay contact output module (2A)

A1SX48Y58 16 [16 output points] 0.06 0.06
Specified number of points

Dynamic input 16/32/48/64 points [Input
A1S42X 0.08 –
module 12/24VDC dynamic input module
Specified number of points ]

Dynamic output 16/32/48/64 points [Output
A1S42Y 0.18 0.055
module 12/24VDC dynamic output module
2 - 14

[I/O Assignment
Blank cover A1SG60 Dust-proof cover for unused slot 16 [Empty] – –

16-point, 32-point, 48-point, 64-point selectable [Input
Dummy module A1SG62 – –
module
Pulse catch Short ON-time pulse input module

A1SP60 16 [16 output points] 0.055*5 –
module (pulse with a minimum of 0.5ms) 16 input points
A module whose timer setting value can be

Analog timer changed for different volumes (0.1 to 1.0s1 to
A1ST60 16 [16 output points] 0.055*5 –
module 10s10 to 60s60 to 600s)
Analog timer 8 points
Interrupt module for specifying the interrupt

Interrupt [32 special
A1SI61 program 32 0.057*5 –
module points]
(16-point interrupt input)
32-bit signed binary [32 special

A1SD61 32 0.35 –
50kPPS, 1 channel points]
24-bit signed binary, 2 channel

[32 special
A1SD62 100kPPS, DC input, 32 0.1 –
points]
transistor output (sink type)

[32 special
High-speed A1SD62D 200kPPS, difference input, 32 0.25 –
points]
counter module transistor output (sink type)

[32 special
A1SD62D-S1 200kPPS, difference input, 32 0.27 –
points]
transistor output (sink type)

[32 special
A1SD62E 100kPPS, DC input, 32 0.1 –
points]
transistor output (source type)
4 to 20mA/0 to 10V [32 special

A1S64AD 32 0.4 –
4 analog channels points]
A/D converter
module
A1S68AD 32 0.4 –
8 analog channels points]

A1S62DA 32 0.8 –
2 analog output channels points]
D/A converter -10 to 10V input [32 special

A1S68DAV 32 0.65 –
module 8 analog output channels points]
4 to 20mA input [32 special

A1S68DAI 32 0.85 –
8 analog output channels points]
Analog input, 2 channels, simple loop control is

[32 special
A1S63ADA allowed 32 0.8 –
points]
1 analog output channels
Analog I/O
module
Analog input, 4 channels, simple loop control is
[64 special
A1S66ADA allowed 64 0.21 0.16
points]
2 analog output channels
2 - 15

[I/O Assignment
For connecting to Pt100 (3-wire) [32 special

A1S62RD3 32 0.49 –
Temperature input, 2 channels points]
For connecting to Pt100 (4-wire) [32 special

A1S62RD4 32 0.39 –
Temperature input, 2 channels points]
[32 special
A1S68TD Thermocouple input, 8 channels 32 0.32 –
points]
Transistor output, thermocouple input

A1S62TCTT- [32 special
2 channels/modules 32 0.19 –
S2 points]
PID control: ON/OFF pulse

A1S62TCTT 2 channels/modules [32 special
32 0.28 –
BW-S2 PID control: ON/OFF pulse, wire breakage points]
detection function
Transistor output, platinum temperature-mesuring

A1S62TCRT- resistor input [32 special
32 0.19 –
S2 2 channels/modules points]
PID control: ON/OFF pulse
Transistor output, platinum temperature-mesuring

resistor input
A1S62TCRT [32 special
BW-S2 points]
PID control: ON/OFF pulse, wire breakage
detection function
Temperature
regulating Transistor output, thermocouple input
A1S64TCTT- [32 special
module 4 channels/modules 32 0.33 –
S1 points]
PID control: ON/OFF pulse or 2 positioning control

A1S64TCTT 4 channels/modules [32 special
32 0.42 –
BW-S1 PID control: ON/OFF pulse or 2 positioning control points]
Heater wire breakage detection function

A1S64TCRT- [32 special
S1 points]
PID control: ON/OFF pulse or 2 positioning control

A1S64TCRT 4 channels/modules [32 special
32 0.42 –
BW-S1 PID control: ON/OFF pulse or 2 positioning control points]
Heater wire breakage detection function
Transistor output, thermocouple/platinum

temperature-mesuring resistor input.
A1S64TCTR [32 special
T points]
PID control: ON/OFF pulse or 2 positioning
control
Transistor output, thermocouple/platinum

temperature-mesuring resistor input.
A1S64TCTR 4 channels/modules [32 special
32 0.39 –
TBW PID control: ON/OFF pulse or 2 positioning points]
control
Heater break detection function
2 - 16

[I/O Assignment
A1SJ71UC24 [32 special

Computer link function RS-232C, 1 channel 32 0.1 –
-R2 points]
Computer link A1SJ71UC24 Computer link function, printer function [32 special
32 0.1 –
module -PRF RS-232C, 1 channel points]
A1SJ71UC24 Computer link function, multidrop link function [32 special

32 0.1 –
-R4 RS-422/RS-485, 1 channel points]
A1SJ71E71N [32 special

10 Base-T 32 0.69 –
3-T points]

10 Base-T 32 0.56 –
Ethernet -T points] Accessible within
interface the AnACPU
module A1SJ71E71N [32 special device range
10 Base 2 (for Cheapernet) 32 0.66 –
-B2 points]

10 Base 5 (for Ethernet) 32 0.57 –
-B5 points]
Intelligent BASIC (interpreter/compiler)

[32 special
communication A1SD51S RS-232C, 2 channels 32 0.4 –
points]
module RS-422/RS-485, 1 channel
48
1 axis positioning control, speed control, analog First half
A1SD70 voltage output for speed-positioning control 0 to 16 empty points 0.3 –
10V) Second half
32 special points
A1SD75P1- [32 special

For positioning control, pulse output, 1 axis 32 0.7 –
S3 points]
For positioning control, pulse output, 2 axes (2-axis

A1SD75P2- [32 special
simultaneous, linear interpolation, circular 32 0.7 –
S3 points]
interpolation)
For positioning control, pulse output, 3 axes * When different

Positioning A1SD75P3- [32 special
(Independent, 3-axis simultaneous, linear 32 0.7 * – driver is
module S3 points]
interpolation, circular interpolation) connected: 0.78A
For positioning control, digital output, for MR-H-B/ [32 special

A1SD75M1 32 0.7 –
MR-J-B/MR-J2-B, 1-axis SSCNET points]
For positioning control, digital output, for MR-H-B/

MR-J-B/MR-J2-B, 2-axis SSCNET (independent, 2- [32 special
A1SD75M2 32 0.7 –
axis simultaneous, linear interpolation, circular points]
interpolation)
For positioning control, digital output, for MR-H-B/

MR-J-B/MR-J2-B, 3-axis SSCNET (independent, 3- [32 special
A1SD75M3 32 0.7 –
axis simultaneous, 2-axis linear interpolation, 2-axis points]
circular interpolation)
ID interface module [32 special

A1SD35ID1 32 0.25 0.17
ID One reader/writer modules can be connected. points]
interface
module ID interface module [32 special
A1SD35ID2 32 0.25 0.33
Two reader/writer modules can be connected. points]
2 - 17

[I/O Assignment
For the master and local stations of

[32 special
A1SJ71AP21 MELSECNET(II) data link system (for the optical 32 0.33 –
points]
fiber cable)
Access is allowed
MELSECNET(II) For the master and local stations of
A1SJ71AP21 [32 special within the device
data link MELSECNET(II) data link 32 0.33 –
-S3 points] range of the
module (for the GI-type optical fiber cable)
AnACPU.
For the master and local stations of

[32 special
A1SJ71AR21 MELSECNET(II) data link system (for the coaxial 32 0.8 –
points]
cable)
A1SJ71AT21 For the master and local stations of MELSECNET/ [32 special
32 0.66 –
MELSECNET/B B B data link system points]
data link
module For the remote I/O station of
A1SJ72T25B – 0.3 –
MELSECNET/B data link system
B/NET
A1SJ71B62- [32 special
interface Master module for B/NET 32 0.08 –
S3 points]
module
For the control, master, and normal stations of the

[32 special
A1SJ71LP21 MELSECNET/10 data link module system 32 0.65 –
points]
(For the coaxial cable dual loop)

A1SJ71LP21 [32 special
MELSECNET/10 data link module system 32 0.65 –
GE points]
MELSECNET/ (For the GI-type optical fiber cable dual loop)
10 data link
module For the control, master, and normal stations of the
[32 special
A1SJ71BR11 MELSECNET/10 data link module system 32 0.80 –
points]
(For the single bus coaxial cable)

[32 special
A1SJ71LR21 MELSECNET/10 data link module system 32 1.14 –
points]
(For the coaxial cable dual loop)
For the master and local stations of the CC-Link

CC-Link system [32 special
A1SJ61BT11 data link system 32 0.40 –
master module points]
(For the twisted pair shield cable only)
I/O mode
MELSECNET/ For MELSECNET/MINI-S3 master stations (max. [32 special points]
A1SJ71PT32
MINI-S3 master 64 stations). Performs remote I/O and remote 0.35 –
-S3
module terminal control of a total of 512 I/O points. Expanded mode
48 [48 special points]
MELSECNET- MELSECNET-I/O LINK master station.Controls I/O

[64 special
I/O LINK A1SJ51T64 LINK remote I/O module of a maximum of 16 64 0.115 0.09
points]
master module stations and a total of 128 I/O points.
S-LINK
A1SJ71SL92 Master module for S-LINK [32 special
interface 32 0.20 –
N I/O total 128 points points]
module
AS-I interface Master module for AS-I [32 special

A1SJ71AS92 32 0.15 –
module I/O total 496 points points]
Positioning
[32 special
detection A1S62LS Absolute positioning detection module 32 0.55 –
points]
module
2 - 18

[I/O Assignment
PC easier
[16 special
monitoring A1SS91 PC easier monitoring module 16 0.08 –
points]
module
The current con-

Memory card sumption
[32 special
interface A1SD59J-S2 Memory card interface module 32 0.05 – describes in
points]
module connecting
A1SD59J-MIF.
An I/O simulation unit used connected to the base

module.Debugging can be executed without TYP. 0.3
Simulation A6SIM- connecting the I/O module to the base module.Use 64 [64 input points] (When
–
module X64Y64 an expansion cable of the AnS series between the 64 [64 output points] all points
main base of the AnS series and the A6SIM- ON)
X64Y64.
A1SJ71PB92 [32 special

PROFIBUS-DPmaster module 32 0.56 –
PROFIBUS D points]
interface
module A1SJ71PB96 [32 special
PROFIBUS-FMS interface module 32 0.56 –
F points]
Device Net
[32 special
interface A1SJ71DN91 Device net master module 32 0.24 –
points]
module
A1SJ71UC24 [32 special

RS-232Ctype MODBUS interface module 32 0.1 –
MODBUS -R2-S2 points]
interface
module A1SJ71UC24 [32 special
RS-422/485type MODBUS interface module 32 0.1 –
-R4-S2 points]
2 - 19

[I/O Assignment
Large-size graphic operation terminal

A985GOT
256 colors, TFT color, 800 600 dots, high intensity

A975GOT
256 colors, TFT color, 640 480 dots, high intensity

16 colors, TFT color, 640 480 dots, high intensity/
16 colors, TFT color, 640 480 dots, wide viewing
A970GOT
angle/
8 colors, STN color, 640 480 dots/
[32 special *When bus
2 colors, STN monochrome, 640 480 dots 32 0.22 * –
points]* connected

A960GOT
2 colors, EL, 640 400 dots
Medium-size graphic operation terminal

8 colors, STN color, 320 240 dots/
A956GOT
STN monochrome, 320 240 dots/
256 colors, TFT color 320 240 dots

A956WGOT
Graphic
operation
terminal
8 colors, STN color, 320 240 dots/ For RS-232C
A953GOT – – –
STN monochrome, 320 240 dots/ connected only

8 colors, STN color, 320 240 dots/ [32 special *When bus
A951GOT 32 0.22 * –
STN monochrome, 320 240 dots/ points]* connected

8 colors, STN color, 320 240 dots/ For RS-422
A950GOT – – –
STN monochrome, 320 240 dots/ connected only
Large-size graphic operation terminal 8.4"

GT1565- 256/65536 colors, TFT color, 640 480 dots
VTBA (When installing a multi color display board, 65536
colors can be displayed.)
[32 special *When bus
32 0.12 –
points]* connected
Large-size graphic operation terminal 10.4"
GT1575- 256/65536 colors, TFT color, 640 480 dots
VTBA (When installing a multi color display board, 65536
colors can be displayed.)
A1S32B 2 I/O modules can be installed.

Extension
connector on the
Main base unit – – –
right and left side
each.
2 - 20

[I/O Assignment
A1S52B
2 I/O modules can be installed.
A1S52B-S1 The power supply
– – –
module cannot be
A1S55B
installed.
(Power is
A1S55B-S1
supplied from the
main base unit.)
A1S58B
Extension base
8 I/O modules can be installed. – – –
unit
A1S58B-S1
A1S65B
A1S65B-S1 The power supply
– – – module is
A1S68B required.
A1S68B-S1
For extension
A1SC01B 55mm (2.17inch) long flat cable – – –
towards right
A1SC03B 330mm (13inch) long
A1SCO7B 700mm (27.56inch) long

Connection cable
A1SC12B 1200mm (47.24inch) long – – – for the extension
base unit.
A1SC30B 3000mm (118.11inch) long
Extension cable
A1SC60B 6000mm (236.22inch) long
A1SC05NB 450mm (17.72inch) long

Cable for the
A1SCO7NB 700mm (27.56inch) long
A N, A A
– – –
extension base
unit
2 - 21
Product Name Model Name Description Applicable Model
EP-ROM A1SNMCA-8KP 8k steps, equipped with EP-ROM(directly) For A1SJH/A1SHCPU: A6WA-28P required
A1SNMCA-2KE 2k steps, equipped with E2PROM (directly)

Write/read directly from the peripheral device for A1SJH/
Memory
A1SHCPU is possible.
cassette A1SNMCA-8KE 8k steps, equipped with E2PROM (directly)
E2PROM
A2SNMCA- Direct writing to and reading from a peripheral device is

With 30k-step E2PROM (directly)
30KE feasible.
Memory write Used for memory cassette connector/EP-ROM 28-

A6WA-28P Used for ROM writing in A1SNMCA-8KP
adapter pin adapter
Installed in the A1SJHCPU(S8), A1SHCPU,

Battery A6BAT IC-RAM memory backup
A2SHCPU(S1) main unit
For the sink-type input module and sink-type output

A6TBXY36
module. (standard type)
A1SX41(S1/S2), A1SX42(S1/S2), A1SY41, A1SY41P,
A1SY42, A1SY82, A1SH42(S1), A1SH42P(S1)
For the sink-type input module and sink-type output
A6TBXY54
module. (2-wire type)
A1SX41(S1/S2),A1SX42(S1/S2),A1SH42(S1),
A6TBX70 For the sink-type input module (3-wire type)
A1SH42P(S1)
Connector/terminal
block converter unit A6TBX36-E For the source-type input module (standard type) A1SX71, A1SX82-S1, A1SX81(S2)
A6TBY36-E For the source-type output module (standard type) A1SY81, A1SY82
A6TBX54-E For the source-type input module (2-wire type) A1SX71, A1SX82-S1, A1SX81(S2)
A6TBY54-E For the source-type output module (2-wire type) A1SY81, A1SY82
A6TBX70-E For the source-type input module (3-wire type) A1SX71, A1SX82-S1, A1SX81(S2)
AC05TB 0.5m (1.64ft.) for the sink module
AC10TB 1m (3.28ft.) for the sink module

A6TBXY36
AC30TB 3m (9.84ft.) for the sink module A6TBXY54
A6TBX70
Cable for AC80TB 8m (26.24ft.) for the sink module

connector/terminal
block converter unit AC100TB 10m (32.81ft.) for the sink module
AC05TB-E 0.5m (1.64ft.) for the source module
AC10TB-E 1m (3.28ft.) for the source module A6TBX36-E

A6TBY36-E
A6TBY54-E
AC50TB-E 5m (16.40ft.) for the source module
Relay terminal unit A6TE2-16SRN For the sink-type output module A1SY41, A1SY41P, A1SY42, A1SH42(S1), A1SH42P(S1)
2 - 22
Product Name Model Name Description Applicable Model
AC06TE 0.6m (1.97ft.) long
AC10TE 1m (3.28ft.) long

Cable for
connecting the AC30TE 3m (9.84ft.) long A6TE2-16SRN
relay terminal unit
Terminal block
Slim-type terminal block cover for the A1S I/O
cover for the A1S
A1STEC-S module and the special module (terminal block All terminal block connector type modules
I/O module and the
connector type).
special module
IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0.5mm2

A1S-TA32
(AWG20)
IDC terminal block IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0.3mm2
A1S-TA32-3 A1SX41(S1/S2), A1SX71, A1SY41, A1SY71
adapter (AWG22)
IDC terminal block adapter for 32 points 0.75mm2

A1S-TA32-7
(AWG18)
Terminal block For 32 points, conversion into Europe type terminal

A1S-TB32 A1SX41(S1/S2), A1SX71, A1SY41, A1SY41P, A1SY71
adapter block
A6CON1 Soldering-type, straight out
A6CON2 Crimp type, straight out

40-pin connector Sink type (40p FCN)
A6CON3 Insulation-displacement type, flat cable
A6CON4 Soldering-type, straight/diagonal out
A6CON1E Soldering-type, straight out
3-pin D-sub
A6CON2E Crimp type, straight out Source type (37p D-sub)
connector
A6CON3E Insulation-displacement type, flat cable
REMARK
Toa Electric Industrial CO., LTD. provides I/O cables with connectors, which can
connect to 40-pin connector (A1SX41, A1SX42, A1SY41, A1SY41P, A1SY42,
A1SY42P, etc.) or 37-pin D-sub connector (A1SX81, A1SY81) of I/O modules.
Contact:
TOA ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL CO., LTD.
2 - 23
(2) Peripheral device
Product Name Model Name Remark
• A6PHP main unit

• SW GP-GPPA........ GPP function start-up floppy disk for the A series
Plasma hand-held
A6PHP-SET • SW GP-GPPK........ GPP function start-up floppy disk for the K series
graphic programmer
• SW0-GPPU............... User floppy disk (2DD)
• AC30R4.................... RS-422 cable 3m (9.84 ft.)-long
• A6GPP main unit

• SW GP-GPPA......... GPP function start-up floppy disk for the A series.
Intelligent GPP A6GPP-SET • SW GP-GPPK......... GPP function start-up floppy disk for the K series.
• SW0-GPPU................ User floppy disk (2DD).
• AC30R4..................... RS-422 cable 3m (9.84 ft.)-long
Composite video cable AC10MD • Connection cable for the monitor display of the A6GPP screen: 1m (3.28 ft.) long
AC30R4 3m (9.84ft.) long

Connection cable for between the CPU main module and
RS-422 cable
A6GPP/A6PHP
AC300R4 30m (98.43ft.) long
Floppy disk for storing user programs

User floppy disk SW0S-USER 2HD-type
(3.5-inch, pre-formatted)
Floppy disk for cleaning SW0-FDC For A6GPP/A6PHP Floppy disk for cleaning the floppy disk drive.
• A6KB keyboard
Optional keyboard for • AC03R4H.............. Connection cable between A6KB and A6PHP: 0.3m
A6KB-SET-H
A6PHP (0.98 ft.) long
• A6KB-C................. Key sheet for the GPP mode of A6KB
• A6KB keyboard
Optional keyboard for • AC03R4L............. Connection cable between A6KB and A6GPP: 0.3m
A6KB-SET
A6GPP (0.98 ft.) long
• A6KB-C................ Key sheet for the GPP mode of A6KB.
2 - 24
Product Name Model Name Remark
K6PR-K
Printer • For printing out program circuit diagrams and various lists
A7NPR-S1
Connection cable for between A6GPP/A6PHP and printer (K6PR-K, A7NPR-S1,

RS232C cable AC30R2 and a general-purpose printer with RS-232C interface)
3m (9.84ft.) long
K6PR-Y Printer paper for K6PR(S1) and K6PR-K, 9-inch paper, Unit: 2000 sheets
Printer paper
K7PR-Y Printer paper for A7PR and A7NPR, 11-inch paper, Unit: 2000 sheets
Inked ribbon for

K6PR-R Replacement inked ribbon for K6PR-K.
K6PR(K)
Read/write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module

A7PUS
with a RS-422 cable (AC30R4-PUS). (5VDC 0.4A)
Programming module
Read/write of the program is performed by connecting to the CPU main module or
A8PUE
a RS-422 cable (AC30R4-PUS, AC20R4-A8PU). (5VDC 0.4A)
Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A7PUS, A8PUE
AC30R4-PUS
3m (9.84ft.) long
RS-422 cable
Connection cable for between the CPU main module and A8PUE
AC20R4-A8PU
2m (6.56ft.) long
• Used for monitoring the devices of the CPU module, changing the setting values/
Data access module A6DU-B current values, and displaying the operation status. (5VDC 0.23A)
• Connect to the CPU mopdule with an AC30R4-PUS cable.
• An interface module which connects the CPU module and the modem. Using a
Modem interface telephone line, the communication is performed between a remote peripheral
A6TEL
module device and the CPU module. (5VDC 0.2A)
• Connect to the CPU mopdule with an AC30R4-PUS cable.
AC30R4 Connection cable for between the CPU main unit and A6WU: 3m/30m (9.84 ft./
AC300R4 98.43 ft.) long
RS-422 cable
AC03WU Connection cable for between the A6PHP main unit and A6WU: 0.3m (0.98ft.) long
2 - 25
2.4 System Configuration Overview
There are four system configuration types as follows:
(1) Stand-alone system ............. A system that connects with a main base unit, or with a
main base unit and an extension base unit using
extension cable
(2) Data link system ............. A system that controls multiple programmable
controllers and remote I/O modules
(3) Computer link system ............. A system that communicates between the CPU module
and the computer (personal computer, etc.) by using
an A1SJ71UC24 computer link module
(4) Composite system ............. A system that has a combination of a data link system
and a computer link system
The details of the system configuration, number of I/O points, I/O number assignment,
etc., of a stand-alone system are listed on the following page.
2 - 26
(a) A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU system

The following example shows the A1SHCPU system configuration, number of I/
O points, I/O assignment of a stand-alone system.
[When the AnS extension base is used] [When the A N, A A extension base is used]
The following shows an example that the 16-point The following shows an example that the 16-point
module is installed to each slot. module is installed to each slot.
Main base Slot No.

unit
(A1S38B) 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Power supply
CPU module
00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
module
to to to to to to to to
System Configuration 0F 1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F
Extension cable
Slot No.
1st extension
stage 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
UNIT
Power supply
1 1
2 2 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0
module
3 3
4 4
5 5 to to to to to to to to
6 6
7 7
8F 9F AF BF CF DF EF FF
Extension base unit (for A N, A A)
Maximum number of
3rd extension stage 1st extension stage
extension stages
Maximum number of
16 modules
I/O modules
Maximum number of
A1SHCPU: 256 points, A2SHCPU: 512 points
I/O points
Main base unit model

A1S32B, A1S33B, A1S35B, A1S38B
name
Extension base unit A1S65B(S1), A1S68B(S1), A1S52B(S1),

A62B, A65B, A68B, A52B, A55B, A58B
model name A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1)
Extension cable A1SC03B, A1SC07B, A1SC12B, A1SC30B,

A1SC05NB, A1SC07NB, A1SC30NB, A1SC50NB
model name A1SC01B (right-side installation), A1SC60B
(1) Only one A N, A A extension base can be used.(The second extension module cannot be used.)
(2) When the extension base A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A58B(S1) or A52B, A55B, A58B are used, the 5VDC
power is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit. Before use, refer to Section 6.1.3
Precautions and examine if it can be used.
(3) Limit the length of extension cable to 6m (236inch) or shorter.
(4) When using the extension cable, do not install it with the main circuit cables, which has high voltage, large
current, or install them close together.
2 - 27
(1) Assign I/O numbers to the main base unit first, then to the extension base unit.
(2) Assign I/O numbers as if both main base unit and extension base unit have 8 slots each. When the
A1S32B/A1S33B/A1S35B for 2/3/5 slots are used as the main base unit, add 6/5/3 slots (96 points/80
I/O number points/48 points) and assign the extension base unit I/O numbers.
assignment (3) 16 points are assigned to an empty slot.
(When I/O assignment is (4) When an extension base unit for A N or A A is used, be sure to set to a single extension level. If it is set
not performed) to the number of skipped stages, 16 points/slot are assigned to all of skipped stages 8 slots, and thus it
does not work.
(5) Items (2) to (3) can be changed by the I/O assignment.(Refer to the ACPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) Programming
Manual (Fundamentals).)
2 - 28
(b) A1SJHCPU(S8) system
[When the AnS extension base is used] [When the A N, A A extension base is used]
The following shows an example that the 16-point The following shows an example that the 16-point
module is installed to each slot. module is installed to each slot.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot No.
00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 A1SJH : 5
A1SJHCPU to to to to to to to to
Extension cable A1SJH-S8 : 8
0F 1F 2F 3F 4F 5F 6F 7F
1st extension
stage
Extension base unit (A1S58B-S1)
UNIT
1 1
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
System Configuration 2
3
2
3 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0
to to to to to to to to
8F 9F AF BF CF DF EF FF
To 2nd and 3rd extension base units

(Can be used by allocating I/O points.)
*In this example, a 16-point module is installed to each slot.
Maximum number of
3rd extension stage 1st extension stage
extension stages
Maximum number of
16 modules
I/O modules
Maximum number of
256 points
I/O points
Main base unit model

A1S32B, A1S33B, A1S35B, A1S38B
name
Extension base unit A1S65B(S1), A1S68B(S1), A1S52B(S1),

A62B, A65B, A68B, A52B, A55B, A58B
model name A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1)
Extension cable A1SC03B, A1SC07B, A1SC12B, A1SC30B,

A1SC05NB, A1SC07NB, A1SC30NB, A1SC50NB
model name A1SC01B (right-side installation), A1SC60B
(1) Only one A N, A A extension base can be used.(The second extension module cannot be used.)
(2) When the extension base A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A58B(S1) or A52B, A55B, A58B are used, the 5VDC
power is supplied from the power supply module of the main base unit. Before use, refer to Section 6.1.3
Precautions and examine if it can be used.
(3) Limit the length of extension cable to 6m (236inch) or shorter.
(4) When using the extension cable, do not install it with the main circuit cables, which has high voltage, large
current, or install them close together.
2 - 29
(1) Assign I/O numbers to the A1SJHCPU first, then to the extension base unit.
(2) Assign I/O numbers as if both the A1SJHCPU and the extension base unit have 8 slots each.A1SJHCPU
has 0 to 4 slots, and 5 to 7 are empty slots.Thus, the empty slots occupies 16 points 3=48 points.
I/O number (3) 16 points are assigned to an empty slot.
assignment
(4) When an extension base unit for A N or A A is used, be sure to set to a single extension level. If it is set
(When I/O assignment is
to the number of skipped stages, 16 points/slot are assigned to all of skipped stages 8 slots, and thus it
not performed)
does not work.
(5) Items (2) to (3) can be changed by the I/O assignment.(Refer to the ACPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) Programming
Manual (Fundamentals) for details.)
2 - 30
3. SPECIFICATIONS
3 SPECIFICATIONS
The general specification common to various modules is shown.
Item Specifications
Operating ambient
0 to 55
temperature
Storage ambient
-20 to 75
temperature
Operating ambient
10 to 90 % RH, No-condensing
humidity
Storage ambient
10 to 90 % RH, No-condensing
humidity
Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Sweep count
0.075mm
Under 10 to 57Hz –
(0.003inch)
intermittent
Conforming to 10 times each
vibration
Vibration resistance JIS B 3502, 57 to 150Hz 9.8m/s2 –
in X, Y, Z
IEC 61131-2 directions
0.035mm
Under 10 to 57Hz –
(0.001inch) (for 80min).
continuous
vibration 57 to 150Hz 4.9m/s2 –
Shock resistance Conforming to JIS B 3502, IEC 61131-2 (147m/s2 , 3 times in each of 3 directions XYZ)
Operation ambiance No corrosive gasses
Operating elevation*3 2000m (6562ft.) or less
Installation location Control panel
Over voltage category*1 II max.
Pollution degree*2 2 max.
Equipment category Class I
*1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be
connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within
premises.
Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities.
The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V.
*2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the
environment in which the equipment is used.
Pollution level 2 is when only non-conductive pollution occurs. A temporary conductivity
caused by condensing must be expected occasionally.
*3 Do not use or store the programmable controller in the environment when the pressure is
higher than the atmospheric pressure at sea level.
Otherwise, malfunction may result.
To use the programmable controller in high-pressure environment, please contact your local
Mitsubishi representative.
3-1
4. CPU MODULE
4 CPU MODULE
4.1 Performance Specifications
Performance specifications of CPU modules are shown below.
Performance specifications
Model
Item Remark
A1SJHCPU(S8) A1SHCPU A2SHCPU(S1)
Control method Sequence program control method
I/O control mode Refresh mode/Direct mode selectable
Language dedicated to sequence control

Programming language
Relay symbol language, logic symbol language, MELSAP-II (SFC)
Refresh: 0.33 s/step Refresh: 0.25 s/step

Processing speed (sequence instruction)
Direct: 2.1 s/step Direct: 1.9 s/step
Constant scanning Set in special register

Can be set between 10ms and 2000ms in 10ms units.
(Program start-up with a specified interval) D9020.
A1SJHCPU(S8), A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU: 64k byte (built-in RAM)

Memory capacity*1
A2SHCPU-S1: 192k byte (built-in RAM)
A2SHCPU:
Main sequence Max. 14k steps
Max. 8k steps
Program capacity program A2SHCPU-S1:
Set in parameters.
(steps) Max. 30k steps
Subsequence program None
The number of points

Number of I/O device points*2 2048 points (X/Y0 to X/Y7FF)
usable in the program
The number of points

512 points which can be used for
Number of I/O points 256 points (X/Y0 to X/YFF)
(X/Y0 to X/Y1FF) access to actual I/O
modules
*1 Each memory capacity for the programmable controllers is the sum total of the parameters, T/
C setting values, program capacities, file registers, comment points, sampling traces and
status latches.The memory capacities are unchanged.The extension memories cannot be
approved.
For the calculation method of memory capacity, refer to Section 4.2.2.
*2 I/O devices of the actual number of I/O points or later can be used as the MELSECNET/B,
MELSECNET/MINI or CC-Link.
4-1
4. CPU MODULE
Performance specifications (Continued)
Model
Item Remark
Internal relay [M] 1000 points (M0 to M999)

The range can be
Latch relay [L] 1048 points (L1000 to L2047) Total 2048 shared by changed by
M, L, S parameters.
Step relay [S] 0 point (None for the initial status)
Link relay [B] 1024 points (B0 to B3FF)
256 points The range and number

•100ms timer (T0 to T199) ....................... Setting time: 0.1 to 3276.7s of points for use set by
Timer [T] •10ms timer (T200 to T255) .................... Setting time: 0.01 to 327.67s parameters
•100ms retentive timer (none for initial) .... Setting time: 0.1 to 3276.7s (Refer to Section
4.2.1.)
The range and number

256 points
of points for use set by
•Normal counter (C0 to C255)............ Setting range: 1 to 32767 times
Counter [C] parameters
•Interrupt counter (none for default)... Can be use by setting the parameters.
(Refer to Section
Device points
4.2.1.)
Data register [D] 1024 points (D0 to D1023)
Link register [W] 1024 points (W0 to W3FF)
Annunciator [F] 256 points (F0 to F255) Fault finding device
Points set by
File register [R] 8192 points (R0 to R8191)
parameters
Accumulator [A] 2 points (A0, A1)
Index register [V, Z] 2 points (V, Z)
Pointer [P] 256 points (P0 to P255)
Interrupt pointer [I] 32 points (I0 to I31)
Special relay [M] 256 points (M9000 to M9255)
Special register [D] 256 points (D9000 to D9255)
4-2
4. CPU MODULE
Performance specifications (Continued)
Model
Item Remark
Comment Max. 3648 points (Set by the unit of 64 points) Set in parameters.
Select "Set the output status at STOP to RUN.

Switch output mode from STOP to RUN Set in parameters.
(Default)" or "Output after operation exectution."
Watchdog error supervision (watchdog timer: set within 10ms to 200ms) Refer to Section 4.1.4
Self-diagnostics function
Error detection in the memory, CPU, I/O, battery, etc. for details.
Set in parameters.
Operation mode when there is an error Select STOP or continue
(Refer to Section 4.2.1)
Initial start
Start-up method at RUN (upon power supply on/power restoration after power failure,
automatic restart by turning the RUN switch of the CPU or ON.)
L1000 to L2047 (Default) Range set by

Latch (power failure compensation) range
(Possible to setup latch ranges for L, B, T, C, D, W) parameters.
Remote RUN/PAUSE contacts Possible to set one contact point for each of RUN/PAUSE from X0 to X1FF. Set in parameters.
Print title regisration YES (128 characters) Set in parameters.
Keyword registration YES Set in parameters.
I/O assignment Possible to register number of occupied I/O points and module model names.
Step operation None
Possible to operate an interrupt program by the interrupt module

Interrupt processing
or constant period interrupt signal.
Data link MELSECNET, MELSECNET/B
Year, month, day, hour, minute, second, day of the week

(automatic detection of the leap year)
Clock function -3.1 to +5.3s (TYP.+1.7s)/d at 0

Accuracy
-1.6 to +5.3s (TYP.+2.4s)/d at 25
-9.6 to +3.6s (TYP.-2.1s)/d at 55
Allowable momentary power failure period Depending on the power supply modules Refer to Section 5.1.
5VDC internal current consumption 0.3A 0.4A
A1SJHCPU:1.00kg
Weight 0.33kg
A1SJHCPU-S8:1.06kg
A1SJHCPU:
130mm
(5.12inch) 330mm (13
inch) 82mm (3.23inch)
130mm (5.12inch) 54.5mm (2.15inch) 93.6mm
External dimensions A1SJHCPU-S8:
(3.69inch)
130mm
(5.12inch) 435mm
(17.1inch) 82mm
(3.23inch)
4-3
4. CPU MODULE
4.1.1 Overview of operation processing
The following shows an overview of processing which begins with a CPU module power-
on to execute the sequence program.
CPU modules processing may be categorized roughly into the following four kinds:
(1) Initial processing

This is a preprocess to execute sequence operations, and is performed only once
upon power-on or reset.
(a) Resets the I/O module and initialize it.
(b) Initializes the range of data memory for which latch is not set up (sets the bit
device to OFF and the word device to 0).
(c) Allocates I/O address of the I/O module automatically based on the I/O module
number or the position of installation on the extension base module.
(d) Executes the self-diagnostics check for the parameter setting and the operation
circuit. (Refer to Section 4.1.4.)
(e) If the AnSHCPU is used in the master station of an MELSECNET(II)

MELSECNET/B, data link operation begins after setting the link parameter data
in the data link module.
(2) Refresh processing of I/O module

Executes the refresh processing of I/O module.
(Refer to the ACPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Fundamentals).)
(3) Operation processing of a sequence program

Executes the sequence program from step 0 to the END instruction written in the
programmable controller CPU.
(4) END processing

This is a post-process that finishes one cycle of operation processing of the
sequence program and returns the execution of the sequence program to the step 0.
(a) Executes self-diagnostics checks, such as a fuse blown, an I/O module verify,
and a low battery.
(Refer to Section 4.1.4.)
(b) Updates the current value of the timer, sets the contact ON/OFF, updates the
current value of the counter and sets the contact to ON.
(Refer to the ACPU/QCPU-A (A mode) Programming Manual (Fundamentals).)
(c) Executes the data exchange between the programmable controller CPU and a
computer link module (e.g. A1SJ71UC24-R2) when there is a data read or write
request from the computer link module.
4-4
4. CPU MODULE
(d) Executes the refresh processing when there is a refresh request from the
network module or link module.
Note that the AnSHCPU can enable and disable execution of link refresh by turn-
ing ON/OFF M9053 and by issuing DI/EI instructions.
(e) When the trace point setting of sampling trace is set for each scan (after END
instruction execution), stores the device status for which it is setup into the
sampling trace area.
Fig. 4.1 CPU module operation processing
4-5
4. CPU MODULE
POINT
When executing the FROM/TO instruction for the special function module
frequently in short scan time, it may cause an operation error in the target special
function module.
When executing the FROM/TO instruction, match the processing time and
conversion time for the special function module using timer or constant scan
function.
4-6
4. CPU MODULE
4.1.2 Operation processing of RUN, STOP and PAUSE
The programmable controller CPU can be operated in the RUN, STOP and PAUSE as
described below.
Operation processing of programmable controller CPU in each operation status is
explained.
(1) Operation processing in RUN

(a) RUN status means that the sequence program operation is repeated as step 0
END (FEND) instruction 0.
(b) When entering the RUN status, outputs the stored output status at STOP
because of setting the output mode as STOP RUN in the parameters.
(c) Processing time from switching STOP RUN to the start of the sequence
program operation is usually one to three seconds, although it may vary
depending on the system configuration.
(2) Operation processing in STOP

(a) STOP status means that the sequence program operation is canceled due to the
RUN/STOP key switch, STOP instruction, or the remote STOP. (Refer to Section
4.3.)
(b) When entering the STOP status, stores the output status and sets all output
points to OFF. Data memories except for output (Y) are retained.
(3) Operation processing in PAUSE

(a) PAUSE status means that the sequence program operation is canceled retaining
output and data memories. (Refer to Section 4.3.)
4-7
4. CPU MODULE
(4) Programmable controller CPU operation processing when RUN/STOP key switch is
operated
Programmable controller CPU Operation Processing
Operation Data Memory

Remark
RUN/STOP Key Switch Processing of
External Output
Operation Sequence M, L, S, T, C, D Y
Program
Retains the condition OS stores the output

Executes up to the OS stores the output
immediately prior to status, and sets all
RUN STOP END instruction, status, and sets all the
entering the STOP the output points to
then stops. output points to OFF.
status. OFF.
Determines
Determines according Starts operations
according to the
to the output mode from the status
STOP RUN Starts. output mode upon
upon STOP RUN in immediately before
STOP RUN in the
the parameters. STOP.
parameters.
POINT
1. In any statuses of RUN, STOP or PAUSE, programmable controller CPU

performs the following:
Refresh processing of I/O module
Data communication with computer link module
Link refresh processing
Thus, even in STOP or PAUSE, monitoring or testing I/O with peripheral
devices, read/write with a computer link module, and communication with
other stations by MELSECNET are possible.
4-8
4. CPU MODULE
4.1.3 Operation processing upon instantaneous power failure
The programmable controller CPU detects a momentary power failure when input power
voltage supplied to the power supply module becomes lower than the specified range.
When the programmable controller CPU detects an instantaneous power failure, the
following operation processing is performed.
(1) When an instantaneous power failure shorter than allowable momentary power
failure period occurred:
(a) When an instantaneous power failure occurred, the operation processing is
interrupted while the output status is retained.
(b) When the instantaneous power failure is reset, the operation processing will be
continued.
(c) When an instantaneous power failure occurred and the operation was
interrupted, measurement of the watchdog timer (WDT) continues. For instance,
in the case that WDT is 200ms and the scan time is 190ms, if an instantaneous
power failure of 15ms occurs, it causes the watchdog timer error.
Instantaneous power failure occurred Power supply restoration
END 0 END END
Programmable controller
CPU operation processing
Operation processing upon instantaneous power failure
(2) When an instantaneous power failure longer than the allowable momentary power
failure period occurred:
The programmable controller CPU performs the initial start.
The operation processing is the same as power-on or reset operation with the reset
switch.
4-9
4. CPU MODULE
4.1.4 Self-diagnostics function
Self-diagnosis is a function that a CPU module diagnoses itself for the presence of any
abnormalities.
(1) While turning on the programmable controller power or when an error occurred in the
PLC RUN, the error is detected and displayed, and the operation is stopped by the
self-diagnostics function, which the CPU module performs, to prevent programmable
controller malfunctions and give preventive maintenance.
(2) The CPU module stores the error occurred last to a special register D9008 as an
error code.
(3) The following shows contents of the error information. (The error which occurred
last):
(a) The time and date of error occurrences.................... Year, month, day, hour,
minute, second (Clock data)
(b) Error Code................................................................ The content of the special
register D9008
(c) Detailed error code.................................................... The content of the special
register D9092
(d) Error step and error module installation address.......The content of the special
register D9010, D9000,
D9002
(4) When detecting an error by self-diagnosis, AnSHCPU takes action in the following
modes:
• Mode wherein the programmable controller operation is stopped
• Mode wherein the programmable controller operation is continued
In addition, some errors can be skipped or stopped by setting parameters.
(a) When an operation stop error is detected by the self-diagnosis, the AnSHCPU
stops the operation at error detection, and sets the all outputs(Y) to OFF.
(b) When an error of operation continued is detected, the only part of the program
with the error is not executed while the other part is executed.
Also, in the case of module verify error, the operation is continued using the I/O
address prior to the error.
Since error occurrence and error contents are stored in the special relay (M) and
special register (D) at error detection, use in the program for preventing any
malfunctions of the programmable controller or mechanical system especially in
mode wherein the programmable controller operation is continued.
The next page shows error descriptions detected by the self-diagnosis.
4 - 10
4. CPU MODULE
REMARK
(1) As to the LED indication, the order of priority of the LED indication can
be changed if CPU module is in the operation mode. (Error codes are
stored in the special register.)
(2) When the special relay M9084 is ON, checking on fuse blown, I/O
verification and the battery are not performed. (Error codes are not
stored in the special register.)
(3) The "Error indication of peripheral device" in the table of self-diagnostics
functions are messages that is indicated by the PLC diagnosis of
peripheral devices.
4 - 11
4. CPU MODULE
Self-diagnostics list
CPU Mod- Status of Error Code
Diagnostic Item Diagnostic Timing Error Message
ule Status "RUN" LED (D9008)
Instruction code check Upon execution of each instruction INSTRCT CODE ERR. 10
When power is ON or RESET

Parameter setting check When switching from (STOP, PAUSE) PARAMETER ERROR 11
to (RUN)
When M9056 or M9057 is ON

No END instruction When switching from (STOP, PAUSE) MISSING END INS 12
to (RUN)
Memory error
CJ SCJ JMP CALL(P) FOR to NEXT Stop Flickering

Upon execution of each instruction
Unable to execute instruction CAN'T EXECUTE(P) 13
When switching from (STOP, PAUSE)
to (RUN)
Format (CHK instruction) check When switching from (STOP, PAUSE) CHK FORMAT ERR. 14
to (RUN)
When interruption occurrs

Unable to execute instruction When switching from (STOP, PAUSE) CAN'T EXECUTE(I) 15
to (RUN)

RAM check RAM ERROR 20
When M9084 is ON during STOP
CPU error
Operation circuit check When power is ON or RESET OPE.CIRCUIT ERR. 21

STOP Flickering
Watchdog error supervision Upon execution of END instruction WDT ERROR 22
END instruction not executed Upon execution of END instruction END NOT EXECUTE 24
Main CPU check Always MAIN CPU DOWN 26
Upon execution of END instruction

Module verify error
(However, not checked when M9084 is UNIT VERIFY ERR. 31
*1 (Default: stop)
I/O error
ON.) Flickering/
STOP/RUN
Upon execution of END instruction ON
Fuse blown
(However, not checked when M9084 is FUSE BREAK OFF 32
*1 (Default: stop)
ON.)
Control bus check Upon execution of FROM, TO instruction CONTROL-BUS ERR. 40
Special function module error Upon execution of FROM, TO instruction SP.UNIT DOWN 41

Link module error LINK UNIT ERROR 42
Special function module error
When switching from (STOP, PAUSE)

to (RUN) STOP Flickering
I/O interrupt error When interruption occurs I/O INT.ERROR 43

When switching from (STOP, PAUSE) SP.UNIT LAY.ERR. 44
assignment error
to (RUN)
Special module access error Flickering/

Upon execution of FROM, TO instruction STOP/RUN SP.UNIT ERROR 46
*1 (Default: stop) ON

Link parameter error When switching from (STOP, PAUSE) RUN ON LINK PARA.ERROR 47
to (RUN)
Always
Battery
Low battery (However, not checked when M9084 is RUN ON BATTERY ERROR 70
ON.)
Operation error Flickering/ OPERATION ERROR*2

Upon execution of each instruction STOP/RUN 50
*1 (Default: stop) ON [ CHK ERROR ]
*1 Can be changed by the parameter settings of a peripheral device.

*2 Indicated as a three-digit trouble code only for errors with the CHK instruction.
4 - 12
4. CPU MODULE
4.1.5 Device list
Device means a general name for such as a contact, coil and timer used on the program
operations in a programmable controller.
The following shows usage ranges and device names of the programmable controller.
For "*" in the devices below, they can be used by setting the parameters on each
peripheral device. Also, they can be changed the usage ranges assignment.
Set the parameters depending on the usage system and contents of the programs.
For the detailed setting for parameters, refer to Section 4.2.1 "List of parameter setting
range".)
Device list
Usage Range (points)
Device Description of Device
A2SHCPU: Used for the supply programmable controller commands and data
X Input X/Y0 to X/Y1FF from the external devices such as push buttons, select switches,
X/Y0 to X/YFF X/Y0 to X/YFF (512 points) limit switches and digital switches.
(256 points) (256 points) A2SHCPU-S1: Used for the output control results of the program to the external
Y Output X/Y0 to X/Y3FF devices such as solenoids, magnetic switches, signal lights and
(1024 points) digital display device.
• Possible to use in a program from the I/O points usage range for
X Input each PLC (described above) up to 2048 points.(External output
X/Y0 to X/Y7FF (2048 points) is not allowed.)
• Allocates for remote I/O of MELSECNET(B) and for auto refresh

Y Output
of CC-Link.
An auxiliary relay that is used in a programmable controller set in

Special relay M9000 to M9255 (256 points)
advance for a special application.
M
An auxiliary relay in a programmable controller that cannot output
*Internal relay
directly to external devices.
An auxiliary relay in a programmable controller that cannot output

L *Latch relay M/L/S0 to M/L/S2047 (2048 points) directly to the external devices. Has the power failure
2048 points as a total of M, L, S compensation function.
Used in the same manner as the internal relay (M).

S *Step relay Used as a relays to indicate the stage number of process stepping
program, etc.
An internal relay for data link. Cannot output to external

R Link relay B0 to B3FF (1024 points) devices.The range not set by the link parameters can be used as a
substitute for a data register.
For error detection. A fault finding program is created in advance,

F Annunciator F0 to F255 (256 points) and if it becomes ON during RUN, the number is stored in a special
register D.
*100ms timer
*10ms timer Up-timing-timer. There are three kinds: 100ms timer, 10ms timer
T T0 to T255 (256 points)
and 100ms retentive timers.
*100ms retentive
timer
*Counter C0 to C255 (256 points) Up-timing

Interrupt counter can be used by setting There are two kinds: up-timing counter used in programmable
C
parameters. controller programs, interrupt counter used in counting the number
*Interrupt counter
of interrupts.
Data register D0 to D1023 (1024 points) Memory that stores data inside the programmable controller.
D
Special register D9000 to D9255 (256 points) Data memory set up in advance for the special application
Register for a data link

W Link register W0 to W3FF (1024 points) The range not set by the link parameters can be used as a
substitute for a data register.
4 - 13
4. CPU MODULE
Device list (Continued)

Usage Range (points)
Device Description of Device
For the data register expansion. User memory area is used for
R *File register R0 to R8191 (8192 points)
this.
Data register that stores a operation result of basic and

A Accumulator A0, A1 (2 points)
application instructions.
Z Used for qualification of devices (X, Y, M, L, B, F, T, C, D, W, R,

Index register V, Z (2 points)
V K, H, P)
N Nesting N0 to N7 (8 levels) Indicates nesting structure of a master control.
Indicates destination of the branch instructions (CJ, SCJ,

P Pointer P0 to P255 (256 points)
CALL, JMP).
When an interruption factor is generated, indicates the

I Interrupt pointer I0 to I31 (32 points) destination of the interrupt program corresponding to the
interruption factor.
K-32768 to K32767 (16-bit instruction) Used to set timer/counter, pointer number, interrupt pointer
K Decimal constant K-2147483648 to K2147483647 (32-bit number, bit device digits, and values for basic and application
instruction) instructions.
H0 to HFFFF (16-bit instruction)

H Hexadecimal Used to the set values for basic and application instructions.
H0 to HFFFFFFFF (32-bit instruction)
REMARK
The step relay in the above list can be used in the same manner as the internal
relay (M). For the program creation with two kinds of functions in one program,
it is usable to divide the step relay (S) and internal relay (M) into a category of
such as a function and usage in using.
4 - 14
4. CPU MODULE
4.2 Parameter Setting Ranges
Parameter contents in the CPU modules and parameter setting ranges are explained
below.
4.2.1 List of parameter setting range
Parameters are used for allocating the user memory area inside the CPU module, setting
various functions and device ranges.
A parameter is usually stored in the first 3k bytes of the user memory area.
Even though a default value can be used, parameter value can be changed to a value
suitable for a particular application within a setting range by the peripheral devices.
List of parameter setting range

Setting Range
Item Default Value
1 to 8k steps 1 to 8k steps 1 to 14k steps

Main sequence program capacity 6k steps
(1k step = in 2k-byte units) (1k step = in 2k-byte units) (1k step = in 2k-byte units)
0 to 14k bytes 0 to 14 bytes 0 to 26k bytes

Microcomputer program capacity –
(in units of 2k bytes) (in units of 2k bytes) (in units of 2k bytes)
File register capacity – 0 to 8k points (1k point = in 2k-byte units)
0 to 3648 points (64 points unit = in 1k byte units)

Comment capacity –
[When comment capacity is set up, 1k byte is added to the memory area.]
Expanded comment capacity – 0 to 3968 points (64 points unit = in 1k byte units)
Memory capacity 0/8 to 16k bytes
Status latch Data memory – No/Yes
File register No/Yes (2 to 8k bytes)
Memory capacity 0/8k byte(s)
Device setting Device No.
Sampling For each scan

Executing –
trace
condition
For each period
Number of 0 to 1024 times

sampling times (in units of 129 times)
Link relay (B) B0 to B3FF (in units of 1 point)
Timer (T) • Latch: only T0 to T255 (in units of 1 point)

Latch range
L1000 to
setting
Counter (C) L2047 C0 to C255 (in units of 1 point)
(power failure
• None for
compensation)
Data register (D) others. D0 to D1023 (in units of 1 point)
Link register (W) W0 to W3FF (in units of 1 point)
M0 to M999
Settings for internal relay (M), M/L/S0 to M/L/S2047
L1000 to L2047
latch relay (L), step relay (S) (where M, L, S are serial numbers)
None for S
4 - 15
4. CPU MODULE
List of parameter setting range (Continued)

Setting Range
Item Default Value
Watchdog timer setting 200ms 10ms to 2000ms (in units of 10ms)
T0 to T199
Timer (100ms) • 256 points by 100ms, 10ms, and retentive timers (in 8-point units)
T0 to T255
settings T200 to • Timers are serial numbers.
T255(10ms)
System
Interrupt counter
interrupt – • Sets the interrupt counter start Nos. (in units of 8 points).
start No.
setting
0 to 64 points (in 16-point units) ..................................... Input module/output module

Special function module/empty slot
I/O number assignment –
• Module model name registration is possible.
Remote RUN/PAUSE contact • X0 to X7FF

–
setting • RUN/PAUSE .......... 1 point (Setting only PAUSE contact is not allowed.)
Fuse blown Continue
I/O verify error Stop

Operating
mode when
Operation error Continue Stop/Continue
there is an
error Special function
module check Stop
error
Data communication request

None Yes/No
batch processing
Ouput data at
Output mode at STOP to RUN the time of Output before STOP/after operation
STOP restored
Print title entry – • 128 characters
Keyword registration – • Up to 6 characters in hexadecimal (0 to 9, A to F)
Number of link
• 0 to 64 station(s)
stations
Link range X/Y0 to X/YFF X/Y0 to X/YFF X/Y0 to X/Y1FF

I/O (X/Y)
settings for – (in 16-point units) (in 16-point units) (in 16-point units)
MELSECNET
Link relay (B) • B0 to B3FF (in units of 16 points)
Link register (W) • W0 to W3FF (in units of 1 point)
4 - 16
4. CPU MODULE
4.2.2 Memory capacity setting (for main program, file register, comment, etc.)
64k bytes user memory (built-in RAM) has fitted with the CPU module as standard
equipment.
Parameters, T/C set value, main program, sampling trace, status latch, file register, and
comment data are stored in the user memory.
(1) Calculation of memory capacity

Determine the data types to be stored and the memory capacity with parameters
before using the user memory.
Calculate the memory capacity according to Table 4.1.
Table 4.1 Memory capacity
Change
Item Setting Unit Memory Capacity into Remark
ROM
The parameter and T/C set

Parameter, T/C set value – 4 k bytes (fixed)
value occupy 4k bytes.
(Main sequence program capacity)

Sequence program 1k step Usable –
2k bytes
Main
program
Microcomputer
2k bytes (Main microcomputer program)k byte –
program
Sampling trace No/Yes 0/8k byte(s)
Data memory No/Yes 0/8k byte(s) Memory capacity of status latch

Status in the file register is determined
latch (Number of file register points) by the file register points set in
File register No/Yes
2k bytes the parameter.
Not
usable
(Number of file register points)
File register 1k point –
2k bytes
When the comment capacity is

Comment 64 points ((Number of comments)/64+1)k bytes set, the system occupies 1k
byte.
4 - 17
4. CPU MODULE
(2) Storing order in the user memory

Each data set by the parameters are stored in the order shown below:
Execute the memory protect after confirming that the write area during execution of
the sequence program such as a file register is not in the memory protect range.
(a) When the main program data is written to ROM
Even if the main program is written to ROM, it cannot be used for other use.
Which is because the same built-in RAM area (the area in the fig.*1) is used in
the system as the case that RAM is running .
4 - 18
4. CPU MODULE
4.3 Function List
Various functions of the CPU modules are explained below.
Function (application) Description Overview of Setting and Operation
Constant scan • Makes the processing time for a single scan in the sequence
•Program execution at program constant. • Write to the special register D9020
constant intervals • Set the processing time within the range of 10ms to 2000ms by the sequence program.
•Simplified positioning by 10ms.
Latch (power failure • When the power supply failure of 20ms or the longer/CPU
compensation) reset/power supply off occurs, data contents of the devices
• Latch device and latch range are
for which latches have been set up in advance are retained.
specified by setting of the
Continuous control by data • Latch-enabled devices: L, B, T, C, D, W
peripheral device parameters.
retention on power failure • Latched data are stored in the CPU main module and
backed up by the batteries of the CPU main module.
• When performed with the external

input (X), the parameter is set with
Remote RUN/STOP a peripheral device.
• When a programmable controller CPU is in RUN (the RUN/
• When performed by a peripheral
When performing RUN/ STOP key switch is set to RUN), performs the
device, perform in the
STOP control from outside programmable controller's STOP/RUN from outside the
programmable controller test
the programmable controller programmable controller (external input, peripheral devices,
operation.
computer) with a remote control.
• When performed via the computer
link module, perform using the
dedicated commands.
• Stops the operation processing of a programmable controller

PAUSE • Performed by the peripheral device
CPU while retaining the ON/OFF of all the outputs (Y).
in the programmable controller test
•When stopping the When the operation is stopped by STOP, operation.
operation of CPU while all the outputs (Y) are set to OFF. • When performed with the external
retaining the output (Y) input (X), perform the parameter
•When performing RUN/ • When a programmable controller CPU is in RUN (the RUN/
setting with the peripheral device,
PAUSE control from STOP key switch is set to RUN), performs the
set the special relay M9040 to ON
outside the programmable programmable controller's STOP/RUN from outside the
with the sequence program, then
controller programmable controller CPU (external input, peripheral
perform.
devices, computer) with a remote control.
• With respect to the devices to which status latches are set

Status latch
up, when the status latch conditions are met, the data
• Set-up devices of status latch is
Carries out operation check contents of the devices are stored in status latch area in the
performed by parameter setting of
and failure factor check on CPU main module.
peripheral devices.
each device when • The criteria for the satisfied condition can be selected from
• Using the peripheral devices,
debugging or a failure when the SLT instruction is executed by the sequence
monitor the status latch data.
condition is met. program or when the device value matches the set
condition.
(To the next page)
4 - 19
4. CPU MODULE
(Continued)
Function (application) Description Overview of Setting and Operation
• Set-up of the memory capacity for

sampling trace is performed by the
Sampling trace • With respect to a device for which the sampling trace is set parameter setting of peripheral
Performs chronological up, the operatinon condition of the device is sampled for the devices.
checking to the operation number of times specified per scan or per hour, and the • Set the device which executes
status of setup devices results are stored in the sampling trace of the CPU main sampling trace, trace point, and
when debugging or an module. number of times using the
abnormal operation is • Sampling trace is performed by the STRA instruction in the peripheral devices.
detected. sequence program. • Using the peripheral devices,
monitor the result of the sampling
trace.
• Executes the operation of the clock built into the CPU

module.
• Sets data for D9025 to D9028 by a
• Clock data: year, month, day , hour, minute, second, day of
Clock peripheral device, turns M9025 ON,
the week
then writes the data to the clock
Program control by clock • When the clock data read request (M9028) is ON, the clock
element.
data/external display of data are read out and stored in D9025 to D9028 by the clock
• Writes to the clock element by the
clock data element after the END processing of the sequence
sequence program. (Dedicated
operation.
instructions can be used.)
• The clock elements are backed up with the batteries in the
CPU main module.
• Allows the device (Y, M, L, S, F, B) used with the OUT

• Use the test function fitted with the
Offline switch instruction to be disconnected from the operation processing
peripheral devices for set-up.
of the sequence program.
Priority order of LED indication • Writes data as to whether to

• For ERROR LED indication except for operation stop,
Changing priority order of change the order/cancel the display
changing the order of display/canceling the display are
display/canceling display to D9038 or D9039 by the
executed.
sequence program.
• There are some self-diagnostics

items with which the operation can
• When an error that matches one of the self-diagnostics
Self-diagnostics function be continued or stopped by the
items is generated at the CPU module power on or during
setting of peripheral device
•An abnormal behavior of RUN, it prevents malfunctions by stopping the CPU module
parameters.
the CPU module operation and indicating the error.
• Reads out the error codes with the
•Preventive maintenance • Stores the error codes corresponding to the self-diagnostics
peripheral device and performs
item.
troubleshooting.
(Refer to Section 4.1.4)
4 - 20
4. CPU MODULE
4.4 Handling Precautions
Precautions when handling the CPU module from unpacking to installation are described
below.
Use the programmable controller under the environment specified in the user's
CAUTION manual.
Otherwise, it may cause electric shocks, fires, malfunctions, product deterioration or
damage.
Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit and then tighten
the module screw within the specified torque.
When no screw is tightened, even if the module is installed correctly, it may cause
malfunctiuons, a failure or a drop of the module.
If too tight, it may damage the screw and/or the module, resulting in a drop of the
module, a short circuit or malfunctions.
Connect the extension cable to the connector of the base unit or module.
Check the cable for incomplete connection after connecting it.
Poor electrical contact may cause incorrect inputs and/or outputs.
Insert the memory cassette and fully press it to the memory cassette connector.
Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before
mounting or removing the module.
Failure to do so may damage the module.
(1) Do not drop or allow any impact to the modules case, memory cassette, terminal
block connector, or pin connector.
(2) Do not remove the module printed wiring board from the case. Otherwise, a
malfunction may occur.
(3) Use caution to prevent foreign matter, such as wire chips, falling into the module
during wiring.
If foreign matter enters the module, remove it.
(4) Tighten the module mounting screws and terminal block screws within the tightening
torque range specified shown the table below.
Screw position Tightening torque range
Module mounting screw (M4 screw) 78 to 118N cm
I/O module (M3.5 screw) 59 to 88N cm
Power supply module terminal screws (M3.5 screw) 59 to 88N cm
4 - 21
4. CPU MODULE
4.5 Part Names
The following shows parts names of the AnSHCPU and the switch setting for using the
AnSHCPU.
4.5.1 Parts names of the A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU(S1), A1SJHCPU (S8)
4 - 22
4. CPU MODULE
No. Name Description
• RUN/STOP: Used to start/stop sequence program operation.
• RESET: Resets the hardware.

Performs the reset and initialization of the operation at the operation
error occurrence.
RUN STOP
(1) • L.CLR Clears the data in the latch area (to OFF or 0) set by
key switch
(LATCH CLEAR): parameters.
(With LATCH CLEAR, data in area other than the latch
area is also cleared.)
For the operation method of the latch clear, refer to
Section 4.5.3.
4 - 23
4. CPU MODULE
• ON: RUN/STOP key switch is in the "RUN" position, and the sequence
program operation is being executed.
In case of an error which does not stop the operation of sequence
program occurs (refer to Section 11.3), the LED remains on.
• OFF: The "RUN" LED turns off in the following cases:
(2) "RUN" LED • The RUN/STOP key switch is set to "STOP".
• Remote STOP is being performed.
• Remote PAUSE is being performed.
• Flashing: The "RUN" LED flashes in the following cases:
• An error which causes operation of the sequence program to stop
has been detected by self-diagnostics.
• During latch clear operation
• ON: An error has been detected by self-diagnostics.

When an error which has been set to LED OFF in the priority order
setting of the LED indication is detected, the LED remains OFF.
(3) "ERROR" LED
• OFF: When failure of the system or target device is detected in normal or by the
CHK instruction.
• Flashing: Annunciator (F) is turned on in the sequence program.
• Connector to write/read, monitor and test the main program with peripheral
(4) RS-422 connector device.
• Cover it with a lid when no peripheral device is to be connected.
• Protective cover for printed-circuit board of CPU module, memory cassette, RS-
422 connector, battery, etc.
• Open the cover to perform the following operations:
(5) Cover Installation and removal of the memory cassette (only for A1SJHCPU)
Setting DIP switches
Connecting the battery to the connector
Battery replacement
(6) Module mounting screw • Used to fix a module to the base unit.
• For the retention of data for program, latch range devices and file registers(for
(7) Battery
installation and removal of battery, refer to Section 7.2)
• Used to switch the I/O control mode or set memory protect to Enable/Disable.
(8) Dip switch
(Refer to Section 4.5.2, Section 4.5.3 for details of the setting.)
(9) Battery connector • For the connection with the connector on the battery side.
Memory cassette installing • Connector to install a memory cassette. (It automatically enters into ROM
(10)
connector operation when a memory cassette is installed.)
(11) "POWER" LED • LED for the 5VDC power indicator.
(12) Base installation hole • A hole used to install the base unit to a control panel.(M5 screw)
4 - 24
4. CPU MODULE
• Used to connect the 100VAC or 200VAC power supply using the power input
(13) Power input terminal
terminal.
(14) LG terminal • Power filter grounding terminal, having the potential half of the input voltage.
• The ground terminal connected to the shielding pattern of the printed-circuit

(15) FG terminal
board.
(16) DIN rail • Hook for DIN rail installation. (2pcs)
(17) RS-422 connector cover • Connector cover for the RS-422
• Connector to install a I/O module or a special module.

To prevent dust from entering, attach the supplied connector cover or a blank
(18) Module connector cover (A1SG60) to the connector with no module installed. Number of I/O slots
A1SJHCPU:5
A1SJHCPU-S8:8
• A connector used to connect an extension cable, by which signals can be

(19) Extension cable connector
transferred to/from an extension base unit.
• Protective cover for extension connector.

(20) Base cover To extend, the area surrounded by the groove below the OUT sign on the base
cover has to be removed using a tool such as a nipper.
(21) Module fixing screw • A screw to fix the module to the base. (M4 12 screws)
(22) Hardware version • Hardware version seal of CPU module
(23) Software version • Software version seal of CPU module
4 - 25
4. CPU MODULE
4.5.2 Setting of I/O control mode switching switch
There are a direct mode and a refresh mode in I/O control mode.
(1) When using the A1SJHCPU(S8) or the A1SHCPU

Use the DIP switch (SW1) to switch the I/O control mode.
Upon shipment, the direct mode (SW1 : ON) is set for both input and output.
Both input and output are Both input and output are
in the direct mode in the refresh mode
(2) When using the A2SHCPU

Use the DIP switch (SW5) to switch the I/O control mode.
Upon shipment, the direct mode (SW5 : ON) is set for both input and output.
4 5
4 5
3
3
2
2
1
1
ON OFF ON OFF
Both input and output are Both input and output are
in the direct mode in the refresh mode
POINT
Make sure that the power supply is OFF before setting the I/O control switching
switch.
4 - 26
4. CPU MODULE
4.5.3 Settings for memory write protect switch
Memory write protect switch is to prevent a program from overwriting and deleting by an
operation from the peripheral device.
It is used to prevent overwriting and deletion of a program after the program is created.
To modify the ROM memory, cancel the memory write protect (OFF).
The memory write protect is set to OFF as factory default.
(1) When using the A1SJHCPU(S8) or the A1SHCPU

With the A1SJHCPU(S8)/A1SHCPU, ON/OFF setting of memory write protect is set
using the DIP switch (SW-2).The first 32 Kbytes in the user memory area of 64
Kbytes are fixed.
When operating using an E2PROM, the setting of the memory write protect switch is
effective to the E2PROM if a memory cassette is installed.
Furthermore, pograms cannot be written to the built-in RAM using peripheral devices
while operating the E2PROM.
By selecting the ON position on this switch, the parameters, program and a part of
extension file register is write-protected in the memory. (Refer to Section 4.2.2.)
(2) When using the A2SHCPU

The memory write protect range can be changed by setting the DIP switches for
memory write protect.
Range of Memory Protection (k bytes) Setting Switch

4 5
0 to 16 1:ON
3
16 to 32 2:ON
2
1
32 to 48 3:ON
48 to 64 4:ON
ON OFF
4 - 27
4. CPU MODULE
(3) When the A2SHCPU-S1

The memory write protect range can be changed by changing the settings of the
memory write protect DIP switches.
Range of Memory Protection (k bytes) Setting Switch
0 to 16 1:ON
16 to 32 2:ON
32 to 48 3:ON
48 to 64 4:ON
64 to 80 5:ON
80 to 96 6:ON
96 to 112 7:ON
112 to 144 8:ON
144 to 192 9:ON
POINT
(1) When the memory protect is used, refer to the address (step number) of each
memory area (sequence program, comment, sampling trace, status latch and
file register) to set protection. (Refer to Section 4.2.2)
(2) When sampling trace or status latch is executed, do not apply the memory
protect to the data storage area.
If the protection is applied, the execution results cannot be stored in the
memory.
REMARK
When E2PROM is used, memory protect is possible with the memory protect
setting pins on the main unit of the A2SNMCA-30KE. Refer to Section 7.1.5.
4 - 28
4. CPU MODULE
4.5.4 Latch clear operation
When performing latch clear by the RUN/STOP key switch, follow the procedures below.
When the latch clear is performed, the device data in the non-latched range is also
cleared.
(1) Switch the RUN/STOP key switch a few times (three or four times) from "STOP" to
"L.CLR", and then "RUN" LED turns flicker at high speed (about 0.2s ON, 0.2s OFF).
If the "RUN" LED turns flicker at high speed, a latch clear is ready.
(2) After the "RUN"LED flickers at high speed, switch the RUN/STOP key switch from
"STOP" to "L.CLR" again, and then the latch clear is all prepared and "RUN" LED
turns off.
In the case of cancelling the latch clear operation halfway, switch the RUN/STOP key
switch to "RUN" to lead the CPU module to RUN status, or switch to "RESET" to lead
it to reset status.
REMARK
The latch clear can also be performed by the operation of GPP function.
For instance, latch clear by A6GPP can be performed by "Device memory all
clear" of the PLC mode test function.
For the operation method, refer to the operating manual for GPP functions.
4 - 29
5. POWER SUPPLY MODULE
5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE

5.1 Specifications
Specifications of power supply modules are shown below.
Table 5.1 Power supply module specifications

Performance Specifications
Item
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
Slot position Power supply module slot
+10% +30%
100 to 240VAC -15% 24VDC -35%
Input power supply
(85 to 264VAC) (15.6 to 31.2VDC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 5 –
Input voltage distortion Within 5% (See Section 8.8) –
Max. input apparent power 105VA 41W
Inrush current 20A, 8ms or less*4 81A, 1ms or less
Rated output 5VDC 5A 3A 5A

current 24VDC – 0.6A –
Overcurrent 5VDC 5.5A or higher 3.3A or higher 5.5A or higher
protection*1 24VDC – 0.66A or higher –
Overvoltage 5VDC 5.5 to 6.5V
protection*2 24VDC –
Efficiency 65% or higher
Allowable momentary power 10ms or less
20ms or less
*3 (24VDC or higher)
failure period
Between primary
Dielectric 500VAC
and 5VDC AC across input/LG and output/FG,
withstand
Between primary 2,830VAC rms/3 cycles (elevation 2,000m (6562 ft))
voltage –
and 24VDC
AC across input/LG and output/FG 10M or higher, measures with a 500VDC
Insulation resistance
insulation resistance tester
Noise voltage 500Vp-p,
• Noise voltage 1,500 Vp-p, Nioise width 1 s,
Noise width 1 s, Noise
Noise durability Noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (noise simulator condition)
frequency 25 to 60 Hz
• Noise voltage IEC801-4, 2kV
(noise simulator condition)
Operation indication LED indication (ON for 5VCDC output)
Fuse Built in (User cannot change.)
Terminal screw size M3.5 7
Applicable wire size 0.75 to 2mm2

Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
Applicable tightening torque 59 to 88N cm
5-1
Performance Specifications
Item
A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P
External dimensions 130mm(5.12inch) 55mm(2.17inch) 93.6mm(3.69inch)
Weight 0.60kg 0.60kg 0.50kg
Table5.2 Performance specifications for the A1SJHCPU(S8) built -in power supply
Model
Item
A1SJHCPU(S8)
+10%
100 to 120VAC -15%
(85 to 132VAC)
Input power supply
+10%
200 to 240VAC -15%
(170 to 264VAC)
Input frequency 50/60Hz 3Hz
Input voltage distortion Within 5% (See Section 8.8)
Max. input apparent power 100VA
Inrush current 20A, 8ms or less*4
Rated output 5VDC, 3A
Overcurrent protection*1 3.3A or higher
Overvoltage protection*2 None
Efficiency 65% or higher
Power indicator POWER LED indicator
Terminal screw size M3.5 8
Applicable wire size 0.3 to 2mm2
Applicable solderless terminal RAV1.25 to 3.5, RAV2 to 3.5
Allowable momentary power failure period*3 20ms or less (100VAC or more)
Dielectric Between primary and 5VDC

AC across input/LG and output/FG,
withstand
2,830VAC rms/3 cycles (elevation 2,000m (6562 ft))
voltage Between primary and 24VDC
AC across input/LG and output/FG 10M or higher, measures with a

Insulation resistance
500VDC insulation resistance tester
• Noise voltage 1,500 Vp-p, Nioise width 1 s,

Noise durability Noise frequency 25 to 60Hz (noise simulator condition)
• Noise voltage IEC801-4, 2kV
5-2
POINT
*1 Overcurrent protection
The overcurrent proctection device shuts off the 5VDC and/or 24VDC
circuit(s) and stops the system if the current exceeding the specified value
flows in the circuit(s).
As this results in voltage drop, the power supply module LED turns OFF or
is dimly ON.
After that, eliminate the causes of overcurrent, e.g., insufficient current
capacity and short-circuit, and then start the system.
When the current value has reached the normal value, the initial start up of
the system will be performed.
*2 Overvoltage protection
The overvoltage protection shuts off the 5VDC circuit and stops the system
if the overvoltage of 5.5 to 6.5V is applied to the circuit.
The power supply module LED turns OFF.
When restarting the system, power OFF and ON the input power supply,
and the initial start up of the system will be performed.If the system is not
booted and the LED remains off, this means that the power supply module
has to be replaced.
*3 Allowable momentary power failure period
The programmable controller CPU allowable momentary power failure

period varies with the power supply module used.
In case of the A1S63P power supply module, the allowable momentary
power failure period is defined as the time from when the primary side of
the stabilized power supply for supplying 24VDC to the A1S63P is turned
OFF until when the voltage (secondary side) has dropped from 24VDC to
the specified voltage (15.6VDC) or less.
*4 Inrush current
If power is reapplied immediately after power OFF (within 5 seconds), an

inrush current exceeding the specified value may flow (for 2ms or less).
Therefore, make sure to re-power ON the module 5seconds after power off.
When selecting a fuse or breaker for an external circuit, consider the above
as well as meltdown and detection characteristics.
5-3
5.1.1 Power supply module selection
Power supply module is selected based on to the total current consumption of the I/O
module, special function module and peripheral devices to which power is supplied by the
subject power supply module. When extension base unit A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1),
A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B, A58B is used, take into consideration that the power to the
module is supplied by the power supply module of the main base.
For 5VDC current consumption of I/O modules, special function modules and peripheral
devices, refer to Section 2.3.
(1) Power supply module selection when extension base unit A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1),
A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B, A58B is used
When extension base unit A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B,
A58B is used, 5VDC power supply is supplied from the power supply module of the
main base unit via extension cable. Thus, when one of these units is used, be careful
with the following:
(a) Select a 5VDC power supply module of the main base unit with sufficient
capacity to supply 5VDC current consumed by A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1),
A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B, A58B.
Example) If 5VDC current consumption on the main base unit is 3A and 5VDC
current consumption on the A1S55B is 1A, then, the power supply
module installed to the main base unit must be A1S61P(5VDC 5A).
(b) Since the power to A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B, A58B
is supplied via extension cable, a voltage drop occurs through the cable. It is
necessary to select a power supply module and cable with proper length so that
4.75VDC or more is available at the receiving port. For the details of voltage
drop, refer to Section 6.1.3, the applicable standards of extension base units.
5-4
5.2 Part Names
Part names of the power supply modules are shown here.
(1) A1S61PN (2) A1S62PN
1) POWER LED LED for the 5VDC power indicator.
Used to supply 24VDC power supply to inside the output module (using external
2) 24VDC, 24GDC terminal
wiring).
3) FG terminal The ground terminal connected to the shielding pattern of the printed-circuit board.
Grounding for the power supply filter. The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN
4) LG terminal
terminal is 1/2 of the input voltage.
5-5
(3) A1S63P
5) Power input terminal Used to connect a 24VDC power supply.
6) Power input terminal Used to connect 100VAC to 240VAC power supply.
7) Terminal screw M3.5 7
8) Terminal cover A protective cover for the terminal block.
Used to fix a module to the base unit.

9) Module mounting screw
(M4 screw; tightening torque: 59 to 88N cm)
POINT
(1) Do not cable to the unused terminals such as FG and LG on the terminal
block (terminals whose name is not printed on the terminal cover).
(2) The protective ground terminal LG must be grounded.
5-6
6. BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE
6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE

6.1 Specifications
This section explains the specifications of the base units (the main and extension base
units) and extension cables available for the systems, and the applicable standards for use
of the extension base units.
6.1.1 Base unit specifications
(1) Main base unit specifications

Table 6.1 Main base unit specifications
Item A1S32B A1S33B A1S35B A1S38B
I/O module 2 modules can be 3 modules can be 5 modules can be 8 modules can be
installing range installed. installed. installed. installed.
Extension
Extendable
possibility
Installation hole
6 bell-shaped holes (for M5 screws)
size
220mm 255mm 325mm 430mm
External (8.66inch) 130mm (10.03inch) 130mm (12.80inch) 130mm (16.92inch) 130mm
dimensions (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm
(1.10inch) (1.10inch) (1.10inch) (1.10inch)
Weight 0.52kg 0.65kg 0.75kg 0.97kg
Accessory Installation screws: M5 25, 4 pcs.
(2) Extension base unit specifications

Table 6.2 Extension base unit specifications
Item A1S65B A1S65B-S1 A1S68B A1S68B-S1 A1S52B A1S52B-S1 A1S55B A1S55B-S1 A1S58B A1S58B-S1
I/O module 5 modules can be 8 modules can be 2 modules can be 5 modules can be 8 modules can be
installing range installed. installed. installed. installed. installed.
Power supply
module installing Power supply module required Power supply module not required
requirement
Installation hole
6 bell-shaped holes (for M5 screws)
size
Terminal screw size – – M4 6 (FG terminal)
Applicable wire size – – 0.75 to 2mm2
Applicable (V) 1.25-4 (V) 1.25-YS4(V)2-YS4A
– –
solderless terminal (Applicable tightening torque98 to 137N cm)
315mm 420mm 155mm 260mm 365mm
External (12.40inch) 130mm (16.54inch) 130mm (6.10inch) 130mm (10.24inch) 130mm (14.37inch) 130mm
dimensions (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm (5.12inch) 28mm
(1.10inch) (1.10inch) (1.10inch) (1.10inch) (1.10inch)
Weight 0.71kg 0.95kg 0.38kg 0.61kg 0.87kg
*1 Dustproof cover (for I/O module): 1 pc.
Accessory Installation screws: M5 25, 4 pcs.
Installation screws: M5 25, 4 pcs.
*1 1 For the attachment of the dustproof cover, refer to Section 8.6.
POINT
For the usage of the base units which do not require power supply module
A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), and A1S58B(S1), refer to the power supply module
selection in Section 5.1.1 and the applicable standards of extension base units in
Section 6.1.3 .
6-1
6.1.2 Extension cable specifications
The specifications of the extension cables applicable to PLC systems are shown in Table
6.3.
Table 6.3 Extension cable specifications

Item A1SC01B A1SC03B A1SC07B A1SC12B A1SC30B A1SC60B A1SC05NB A1SC07NB A1SC30NB A1SC50NB
0.055m 0.33m 0.7m 1.2m 3.0m 6.0m 0.45m 0.7m 3.0m 5.0m
Cable length
(0.18ft.) (1.08ft.) (2.30ft.) (3.94ft.) (9.84ft.) (19.69ft.) (1.48ft.) (2.30ft.) (9.86ft.) (16.43ft.)
Resistive value of
5VDC supply line 0.02 0.02 0.04 0.06 0.12 0.18 0.04 0.05 0.12 0.18
(at 55 )
Application Connection between a main base and A1S5 B(S1)/A1S6 B(S1) Connection between a main base and A5 B/A6 B
Weight 0.025kg 0.10kg 0.14kg 0.20kg 0.40kg 0.65kg 0.20kg 0.22kg 0.40kg 0.56kg
When using the extension cable, do not bundle it with the main circuit cables
together, which has high voltage, large current, or install them close to each other.
6-2
6.1.3 Application standards of extension base units (A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B,
A58B)
When using the A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B or A58B extension
base unit, make sure that the voltage of the receiving port (the module installed in the last
slot of the extension base unit) is 4.75V or more.
Since the power supply module on the main base unit supplies 5VDC to the A1S52B(S1),
A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B or A58B extension base unit, a voltage drop
occurs through the base unit and extension cable. If the specified voltage is not supplied at
the receiving port, incorrect input or output may result.
If the voltage at the receiving port is less than 4.75V, replace the extension base unit with
the A1S65B(S1), A1S68B(S1), A62B, A65B or A68B that has a power supply.
(1) Selection condition

Receiving voltage of the module installed in the last slot of the A1S52B(S1),
A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), A52B, A55B or A58B extension base unit is 4.75V or
more.
The output voltage of the power supply module is set to 5.1V or more. Thus, a
voltage drop of 0.35V or less allows use of the module.
(2) Elements of voltage drop

There are the following elements of voltage drop, (a) to (c), depending on the
connection method and type of the extension base unit.
(a) Voltage drop in the main base unit

(b) Voltage drop in the extension base unit
(c) Voltage drop in the extension cable
Extension Base Extension Cable is Connected to the Left Extension Cable is Connected to the Right
Unit Used Side of the Main Base Unit (in Series). Side of the Main Base Unit (Parallel Installation).
A1S52B(S1),
A1S55B(S1) or A1S3 B
A1S58B(S1) extension
base unit is used. A1S3 B A1S5 B(S1)
(c)
(a) (c) (b)

A1S5 B(S1)
(b)
The voltage drop in the main base unit can

be ignored.
A52B, A55B or A58B

extension base unit is A1S3 B
used.
A1S3 B A5 B
(c)
(a) (c)
A5 B
The voltage drop in the main base unit and The voltage drop in the extension base unit can
extension base unit can be ignored. be ignored.
6-3
(3) Receiving voltage calculation method
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
CPU module
VCPU V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15
ICPU I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 I13 I14 I15
VCPU, V0 to V7 :Voltage drop at each slot of the main base unit

ICPU, I0 to I7 :Current consumption at each slot of the main base unit
V8 to V15 :Voltage drop at each slot of the extension base unit
I8 to I15 :Current consumption at each slot of the extension base unit
(a) Calculation of voltage drops with the main base unit (A1S32B, A1S33B,
A1S35B, A1S38B) Resistive value with the main base unit is 0.007 per
slot.Sum up the voltage drops of each slot.
Current consumption of the CPU module
A1SJHCPU(S8), A1SHCPU :0.3(A)
A2SHCPU(S1) :0.4(A)
1) Voltage drop at the CPU module: VCPU
VCPU=0.007 (ICPU + I0 + I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 + I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9
+ I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
2) Voltage drop at slot 0: V0
V0 =
0.007 (I0 + I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 + I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10
+ I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V1 =
0.007 (I1 + I2 + I3 + I4 + I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11
+ I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V2 =
0.007 (I2 + I3 + I4 + I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12
+ I13 + I14 + I15
V3 =
0.007 (I3 + I4 + I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13
+ I14 + I15)
V4 =
0.007 (I4 + I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13
+ I14 + I15)
V5 = 0.007 (I5 + I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14
+ I15)
V6 = 0.007 (I6 + I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V7 = 0.007 (I7 + I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
10) Total voltage drop at the main base unit: VK
VK = VCPU + V0 + V1 + V2 + V3 + V4 + V5 + V6 + V7
6-4
(b) Voltage drop calculation on the extension base unit (A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1),
A1S58B(S1))
The resistive value on the extension base unit is 0.006 per slot.
Calculate the voltage drop of each slot and obtain the total voltage drop.
V8=0.006 (I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V9=0.006 (I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V10=0.006 (I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V11=0.006 (I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V12=0.006 (I12 + I13 + I14 + I15)
V13=0.006 (I13 + I14 + I15)
V14=0.006 (I14 + I15)
V15=0.006 I15
9) Total voltage drop at the extension base unit: VZ
VZ=V8 + V9 + V10 + V11 + V12 + V13 + V14 + V15
(c) Calculation of voltage drop through the extension cable

[1] Total current consumption of the extension base unit: Iz
IZ= I8 + I9 + I10 + I11 + I12 + I13 + I14 + I15
[2] Voltage drop of the extension cable: Vc

Vc=(Resistive value of the extension cable) Iz
Resistive value of extension cable

A1SC01B......0.02 A1SC60B ......0.182
A1SC03B......0.021 A1SC05NB ......0.037
A1SC07B......0.036 A1SC07NB ......0.045
A1SC12B......0.055 A1SC30NB ......0.12
A1SC30B......0.121 A1SC50NB ......0.18
(d) Verification of the receiving port voltage

(5.1(V)-VK-VZ-VC) 4.75(V)
6-5
(4) Calculation examples
(a) Calculation of voltage drop on the main base unit

VK= 0.007 {0.3 + 0.05 (9 + 8 + 7 + 6 + 5 + 4 + 3 + 2) + (0.27 8) 9} = 0.15358
(b) Calculation of voltage drop on the extension base unit

VZ = 0.006 0.27 (8+7+6+5+4+3+2+1) = 0.05832
(c) Voltage drop on the extension cable

VC = 0.021 (0.27 8) = 0.04536
(d) Verification of the receiving port voltage

5.1-0.15358-0.05832-0.04536=4.84274(V)
Since the receiving port voltage is more than 4.75V, the above system is usable.
(5) To reduce the voltage drop

The following methods are effective to reduce the voltage drop.
(a) Change the installing position of the module
Install the modules with high current consumption in order starting from slot 0 of
the main base unit.
Install modules with low current consumption to the extension base unit.
(b) Connect the base units in series

By connecting base units in series (connecting the extension cable to the left
side of the main base unit. Refer to this section (2), the voltage drop on the main
base unit can be ignored.
If the extension cable is long, however, the voltage drop through the cable may
be larger than that on the main base unit. Therefore, calculate the voltage drop
according to (3).
(c) Use a shorter extension cable

The shorter the extension cable is, the smaller the resistive value and the
voltage drop become.
Use the extension cable as short as possible.
6-6
6.2 Part Names
Part names of the base unit are shown here.
(1) Main base unit (A1S32B, A1S33B, A1S35B, A1S38B)
5) 1) 4) 1)
OUT OUT
Remove with a tool CPU I/O 0 I/O 1 I/O 2 I/O 3 I/O 4 I/O 5 I/O 6 I/O 7
such as a nipper
POWER A1S38B
2) 6) 3) 2)
1) Extension cable connector A connector used to connect an extension cable, by which signals can be
transferred to/from an extension base unit.
2) Base cover A protective cover for the extension cable connector. When connecting extension
cables, remove the area (refer to the part in the above figure) with a tool such as a
nipper.
3) Module connector Connectors used to install the power supply module, CPU module, I/O modules
and/or special function modules.
To prevent dust from entering, install the supplied connector cover or a blank cover
(A1SG60) to any open connector.
4) Module mounting screw hole Screw mounting hole to fix the module to the base. Screw size: for M4 screw
5) Base installation hole A bell-shaped hole used to install the base unit to a control panel. (For M5 screw)
6) Hook for DIN rail Hook for DIN rail installation.

A1S32B, A1S33B ...... 1 pc
A1S35B, A1S38B ...... 2pcs
IMPORTANT
Only one extension base unit can be connected to the main base unit. Connecting
2 extension base units to the main base unit through 2 extension connectors may
cause incorrect input or output.
6-7
(2) Extension base unit (A1S52B, A1S55B, A1S58B, A1S52B-S1, A1S55B-S1, A1S58B-
S1, A1S65B, A1S68B, A1S65B-S1, A1S68B-S1)
5) 2) 4)
A1S65B-S1,
A1S68B-S1
POWER A1S68B
1) 6) 3)
A1S52B-S1, A1S55B-
S1, A1S58B-S1 5) 2) 4)
A1S58B
(FG)
1)
7) 6) 3)
1) Extension cable connector A connector used to connect an extension cable, by which signals can be
transferred to/from an main base unit.
Before connecting the extension cable, remove the supplied connector cover.
2) Base cover A protective cover for the extension cable connector.
3) Module connector Connectors used to install the power supply module, I/O modules and/or special
function modules. To prevent dust from entering, install the supplied connector
cover or a blank cover (A1SG60) to any open connector.
4) Module mounting screw hole Screw mounting hole to fix the module to the base. Screw size: for M4 screw
5) Base installation hole A bell-shaped hole used to install the base unit to a control panel. (For M5 screw)
6) Hook for DIN rail Hook for DIN rail installation.

A1S52B, A1S55B, A1S52B-S1, A1S55B-S1...........................................1 pc
A1S65B, A1S68B, A1S58B, A1S65B-S1, A1S68B-S1, A1S58B-S1.......2 pcs
7) FG terminal The ground terminal connected to the shielding pattern of the printed-circuit board.
6-8
6.3 Installation and Removal of DIN Rail
Each of the main and extension base units is supplied with a DIN rail hook as standard.
The following explains how to install the DIN rail.
(1) Applicable DIN rail type (JIS C 2812)

TH35-7.5Fe
TH35-7.5Al
TH35-15Fe
(2) DIN rail installation screw pitch

When using the TH35-7.5Fe or TH35-7.5Al type DIN rail, tighten the rail-installation
screws by a pitch of 200mm or less to ensure the strength.
6-9
(3) Installing to and removing from the DIN rail

(a) Installing the unit to the DIN rail
The base unit is installed to the DIN rail as follows:
[1] Engage the upper side groove on the base unit with the upper part of the
DIN rail.
[2] Press the base unit to the DIN rail to fix them.
(b) Removing the unit from the DIN rail

The base unit is removed from the DIN rail as follows:
[1] Pull out the projection on the bottom of the base unit with the flat-head
screwdriver (6 100).
[2] With the projection pulled out, pull the base unit to remove it from the DIN
rail.
6 - 10
7. MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY
7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY

7.1 Memory Cassette
This section explains the specifications of the memory cassette, the handling precautions
and the installation and removal procedures.
7.1.1 Specifications
The specifications of the memory cassette are shown in Table 7.1 and Table 7.2.
Table 7.1 Memory cassette specifications (A1SJHCPU(S8)/A1SHCPU)

Model Name
Item
A1SNMCA-2KE* A1SNMCA-8KE A1SNMCA-8KP
Memory specification E2PROM EP-ROM
8k bytes 32k bytes 32k bytes
Memory capacity
(Max. 2k steps) (Max. 8k steps) (Max. 8k steps)
Maximum number of
10,000 times 100,000 times –
writes for E2PROM
External dimensions 15mm (0.59inch) 69.6mm (2.74inch) 40.5mm (1.59inch)
Weight 0.03kg
Table 7.2 Memory cassette specifications (A2SHCPU(S1))

Model Name
Item
A2SNMCA-30KE
Memory specification E2PROM
64k bytes
Memory capacity A2SHCPU : (Max. 14 k steps)
A2SHCPU-S1 : (Max. 30 k steps)
Maximum number of
100,000 times
writes for E2PROM
External dimensions 15mm (0.59inch) 69.6mm (2.74inch) 40.5mm (1.59inch)
Weight 0.03kg
POINT
* When writing a program to the A1SNMCA-2KE, set the parameter for main
sequence program capacity to 2k steps or less.
If the program is written with setting the main sequence program capacity to
3k steps or more, it cannot properly work.
Comparing between the AnSHCPU and a peripheral device will result in a
mismatch.
7-1
7.1.2 Handling precautions
This section explains the specifications of the memory cassette, the handling precautions
and the installation and removal procedures.
(1) Since the memory cassette and pin connector are made of resin, do not drop them or
apply heavy impact to them.
(2) Do not remove the printed-circuit board of memory cassette from the case. Doing so
could give damage to the module.
(3) Carefully prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the inside of the
memory cassette.
If it does get inside the module, remove it immediately.
(4) When installing the memory cassette into the CPU module, fully press it to the
connector.
(5) Do not place the memory cassette on a metal object where current is or can be
leaked, or materials like wood, plastic, vinyl, fibers, electric wires or paper where
static electricity is charged.
(6) Do not touch the lead of the memory. This may damage the memory.
(7) Do not touch the CPU connector of the memory cassette. Doing so may cause poor
contact.
POINT
(1) Before installing the memory cassette to or removing it from the CPU module,
make sure that the power is OFF. Installing or removing the memory cassette
with power ON destroys its memory.
(2) Install the memory cassette and turn on the power supply of CPU module.
RAM memory built-in CPU module (parameter, T/C setting value, main
program) is overwritten.
If the RAM memory is needed, back up the data using a peripheral device
before installing the memory cassette.
7-2
7.1.3 Installation and removal of memory cassette
Insert the memory cassette and fully press it into the memory cassette connector.
CAUTION Check for incomplete connection after installing it.
The installation/removal method of the memory cassette is common in all AnSHCPU

models, but the installation position is unique to each model.
Memory cassette installation position: A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU(S1)...........Left side

A1SJHCPU(S8)..........Front
(1) Installation of the memory cassette
(a) Facing the model name side of the memory cassette to the operator with the
model name shown on the top, insert it into the applied part of CPU module until
a click is heard (a tab is engaged).
(b) Check that the hooks on the top and bottom of the memory cassette are
engaged with the catches of the CPU module.
(If the memory cassette is not installed correctly, the front cover of the CPU
module will not be closed.)
7-3
(2) Removal of the memory cassette
(a) While pressing the top and bottom projections for hook disengagement with
fingers, pull the memory cassette.
7-4
7.1.4 Writing a sequence program to a memory cassette
A sequence program can be written to, or erased from, the A1SMCA-8KP or the
A1SNMCA-8KP using a ROM writer/eraser.
If a memory cassette is installed in the ROM socket of the A6GPP or the A6WU, use either
of the following memory write adapters.
CPU Model Name Memory Cassette Model Name Memory Write Adapter Model Name
A1SHCPU A1SNMCA-8KP
A6WA-28P
A1SJHCPU(S8) A1SNMCA-8KP
POINT
(1) When writing to the ROM for the A1SHCPU or the A1SJHCPU(S8) with the
SWGP-GPPA, the startup model has to be changed..
Set "A0J2H" for Version Q or earlier, or "A1S" for Version R or later.
In addition, select "27256" for the ROM setting type.
(2) Take caution when the software version that selects "A0J2H" or "A1S" is used
to write the ROM, since the file register area of 8k points is reduced to 4k
points.
As a countermeasure, use the software package for which the A1SJH/A1SH
can be selected.
The following explains how to use a memory write adapter.
(1) Mount a memory cassette to the memory write adapter.

Couple the connectors correctly.
(2) Mount the memory write adapter coupled with the memory cassette to the ROM
socket of the A6GPP or the A6WU in the correct orientation.
The pin on the cut corner side of the memory write adapter is pin No.1.
Cut comer
ROM socket
A6WA-28P
A1SNMCA-8KP
7-5
7.1.5 Memory protection setting of A2SNMCA-30KE
When the A2SNMCA-30KE is installed in the CPU module, memory protection can be set
up to the A2SNMCA-30KE to prevent the E2PROM memory from being modified by
erroneous operation of peripheral equipment.
Setting the memory protection setting pin to ON allows the user memory area of 64k bytes
to be protected all at once.
To modify the ROM memory, disable the memory protection (OFF).
The memory protection setting pin is set to OFF as factory default.
For memory area assignment, refer to Section 4.5.2.
7-6
7.2 Battery
This section explains the specifications, handling precautions and installation procedures
of the battery.
Properly connect batteries. Do not charge, disassemble, heat, or throw them into the
DANGER fire and do not make them short-circuited and soldered.
Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic
heat, burst and/or ignition.
7.2.1 Specifications
The specifications of the battery used for power failure compensation are shown in Table
7.2.
Table7.2 Battery specifications
Item A6BAT
Classification Thionyl chloride lithium battery
Initial voltage 3.6VDC
Battery guarantee period 5 years
Lithium content 0.48g
Application IC-RAM memory backup and power failure compensation
External dimensions 16mm (0.63inch) 30mm (1.18inch)
For the battery directive in EU member states, refer to Appendix 6.
7.2.2 Handling precautions
This section explains the specifications, handling precautions and installation procedures
of the battery.
(1) Do not short it.
(2) Do not disassemble it.
(3) Do not put it in a fire.
(4) Do not heat it.
(5) Do not solder to the electrodes.
7-7
7.2.3 Battery installation
The battery connector is removed to prevent battery consumption during distribution and
storage.
Connect the lead connector of the battery to the battery connector on the CPU module
print broad before using CPU module for the following objectives:
• Using the sequence program, file registers or comments in the user program area
in the CPU module
• Using the power failure compensation function
CPU module
A6BAT
Battery connector
7-8
8. LOADING AND INSTALLATION
8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION

To increase the system reliability and fully utilize the functions, procedures and cautions
concerning loading and installation are described below.
8.1 Fail-Safe Circuit Concept
When the programmable controller is powered ON and then OFF, improper outputs may
be generated temporarily depending on the delay time and start-up time differences
between the programmable controller power supply and the external power supply for the
control target (especially, DC).
For example, if the external power supply for the control target is powered ON and then
the programmable controller is powered ON, the DC output module may generate
incorrect outputs temporarily upon the programmable controller power-ON. Therefore, it is
required to build the circuit that energizes the programmable controller by priority.
The external power failure or programmable controller failure may lead to the system error.
In order to eliminate the possibility of the system error and ensure fail-safe operation, build
the following circuit outside the programmable controller: emergency stop circuit,
protection circuit and interlock circuit, as they could cause machine damages and
accidents due to the abovementioned failures.
An example of system design, which is based on fail-safe concept, is provided on the next
page.
Create a safety circuit outside the programmable controller to ensure the whole
DANGER system will operate safely even if an external power failure or a programmable
controller failure occurs.
Otherwise, incorrect output or malfunction may cause an accident.
(1) For an emergency stop circuit, protection circuit and interlock circuit that is
designed for incompatible actions such as forward/reverse rotation or for damage
prevention such as the upper/lower limit setting in positioning, any of them must
be created outside the programmable controller.
Install the emergency stop switch outsid the controlpanel so that workers can
operate it easily.
(2) When the programmable controller detects the following error conditions, it stops
the operation and turn off all the outputs.
The overcurrent protection device or overvoltage protection device of the power
supply module is activated.
The programmable controller CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer
error by the self-diagnostics function.
In the case of an error of a part such as an I/O control part that cannot be detected
by the programmable controller CPU, all the outputs may turn on. In order to make
all machines operate safely in such a case, set up a fail-safe circuit or a specific
mechanism outside the programmable controller.
(3) Depending on the failure of the output module's relay or transistor, the output
status may remain ON or OFF incorrectly. For output signals that may lead to a
serious accident, create an external monitoring circuit.
If load current more than the rating or overcurrent due to a short circuit in the load has
flowed in the output module for a long time, it may cause a fire and smoke. Provide an
external safety device such as a fuse.
8-1
Design a circuit so that the external power will be supplied after power-up of the
DANGER programmable controller.
Activating the external power supply prior to the programmable controller may result
in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction.
For the operation status of each station at a communication error in data link, refer to
the respective data link manual.
The communication error may result in an accident due to incorrect output or
malfunctions.
When controlling a running programmable controller (data modification) by connecting
a peripheral device to the CPU module or a PC to a special function module, create
an interlock circuit on sequence programs so that the whole system functions safely
all the time.
Also, before performing any other controls (e.g. program modification, operating
status change (status control)), read the manual carefully and ensure the safety.
In these controls, especially the one from an external device to a programmable
controller in a remote location, some programmable controller side problem may not
be resolved immediately due to failure of data communications.
To prevent this, create an interlock circuit on sequence programs and establish
corrective procedures for communication failure between the external device and the
programmable controller CPU.
If any slot is left empty, be sure to use a blank cover (A1SG60) or a dummy module
(A1SG62) for it.
When using the extension base unit, A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), attach
the included dustproof cover to the module in slot 0.
Otherwise, internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an
overcurrent or overvoltage is accidentally applied to external I/O section.
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit
CAUTION or power lines, or bring them close to each other.
When an output module is used to control the lamp load, heater, solenoid valve, etc.,
a large current (ten times larger than the normal one) may flow at the time that the
output status changes from OFF to ON. Take some preventive measures such as
replacing the output module with the one of a suitable current rating.
8-2
(1) System design circuit example

AC system AC/DC system
Power supply
Power supply
Transformer Transformer
DC power supply
established signal Fuse
Fuse input
CPU module
CPU module Start/stop circuit
M9006 DC power
Can be started Ym
M9006 supply
Ym by turning ON of M9039
Yn
M9039 RA1, which is the XM
( - )( + )
Yn programmable TM Fuse
Y1 controller's RUN TM
XM output. M9084 The setting for TM
M9084 TM is the time taken
MC1 N0 M10
Start Program to establish the
switch N0 M10
RA1 Start Program DC input signal.
MC switch
Stop RA1
MC MC
switch Input unit MC
RA2 Stop Voltage relay
XM
switch recommended
Input unit RA2
Output unit Output for warning RA2 XM

Ym (lamp or buzzer)
L
Turned ON in RUN
Yn status by M9039 Output for warning
RA1 Output unit
(lamp or buzzer)
Ym
Output unit MC L Turned ON in RUN
Yn status by M9039
MC Switches the power RA1
supply to output devices

OFF when the system
stops: Output unit
MC 2 MC MC
MC1
At emergency stops
at stops on reaching a
MC 1 Switches the power
MC2 limit
supply to output
Y1 Interlock circuit
MC2 devices OFF when
RA2 Constructs external
MC1 the system stops:
interlock circuits for
opposing operations such MC1 At emergency stops
as forward and reverse MC2
at stops on reaching
rotation, and parts that a limit
could cause machine
damage or accidents.
The procedures used to switch on the power supply are indicated below.
AC system AC/DC system
1) Switch the power supply ON. 1) Switch the power supply ON.
2) Set the CPU module to RUN. 2) Set the CPU module to RUN.
3) Switch the start switch ON. 3) Switch RA2 ON when the DC power supply starts.
4) The output equipments are driven in accordance with 4) Set the timer (TM) to "ON" upon 100% establishment of DC power
the program when the magnetic contactor (MC) comes supply.
ON. (Set value for TM shall be the period from RA2 turned "ON" to 100%
establishment of DC power supply. Make this set value 0.5 seconds.)
5) Switch the start switch ON.
6) The output equipments are driven in accordance with the program
when the magnetic contactor (MC) comes ON.
(When a voltage relay is used for RA2, the timer in the program (TM) is
not necessary.)
8-3
(2) Fail-safe measures to cover the possibility of programmable controller failure

Problems with a CPU module and memory can be detected by the self diagnostics
function. However, problems with I/O control area may not be detected by the CPU
module.
In such cases, there is a possibility of setting all points to ON or OFF, or a situation
may develop where normal operations and safety of the controlled subject cannot be
assured, depending on the condition of the failure.
Though Mitsubishi programmable controllers are manufactured under strict quality
control, they may fail or malfunction due to unspecified reasons. To prevent the whole
system failure, machine breakdown, and accidents, build a fail-safe circuit outside the
programmable controller.
Examples of a system and its fail-safe circuitry are described below:
System example
Output
Power Input Input Input Input Output Output Output Output Power Output Output Output 16
CPU
supply 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 supply 16 16 16 points Empty
module
module points points points points points points points points module points points points YB0
to
YBF
Output module for fail-safe purpose*1
*1 The output module for fail-safe purpose should be mounted on the last slot of the system.
(YB0 to YBF in the above system.)
Example fail safe circuits

On delay timer
Internal program YB0 T1

1s
Off delay timer *3
M9032
YB0 T2
1s
External load MC
YB1 L
to to
YB0 YBF L
24V
0.5s 0.5s
- +
0V
24VDC
CPU module Output module

*2 T1 T2
MC
*2 Since YB0 turns ON and OFF alternatively at 0.5 second intervals, use a contactless output
module (a transistor is used in the above example).
*3 If an off delay timer (especially miniature timer) is not available, construct the failsafe circuit
using an on delay timer shown on the next page.
8-4
When constructing a fail safe circuit using on delay timers only

On delay timer
Internal program YB0 T1

1s
M9032
*4
YB0 M1
On delay timer
M1
T2
1s
M1
M2
YB0
M2 T2
0.5s 0.5s
Externai load MC
YB1 L
to to
YBF L
24V
- +
0V
24VDC
CPU module output module T1 M2

MC
*4 Use a solid state relay for the M1 relay.
8-5
8.2 Installation Environment
Avoid the following environment when you install the programmable controller system:
(1) A location in which the ambient temperature falls outside the range of 0 to 55 .
(2) A location in which the ambient humidity falls outside the range of 10 to 90%RH.
(3) Location in which condensation may occur due to drastic changes in temperature.
(4) A location in which corrosive gas or combustible gas exists.
(5) A location in which a lot of conductive powdery substance such as dust and iron
filing, oil mist, salt, or organic solvent exists.
(6) A location exposed to direct sunlight.
(7) A location in which strong electric fields or magnetic fields form.
(8) A location in which the main unit is exposed to direct vibration or impact.
8-6
8.3 Calculation Method of Heat Amount Generated by the PLC
It is necessary to keep the temperature of the panel which stores the PLC to the operating
ambient temperature of the PLC, which is 55 , or below. For heat dissipation design of
the panel, it is necessary to know the average power consumption (heat generation) of the
devices and machinery stored inside. In this section, a method to obtain the average
power consumption of the PLC system is explained. Calculate the temperature rise inside
the panel from the power consumption.
(Calculation method of average power consumption)

The power consuming parts of the PLC may be roughly classified into the blocks as shown
below:
(1) Power consumption by power supply module

The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is about 70%, and 30%
is consumed as heat generated, thus, 3/7 of the output power is the power
consumption. Therefore, the calculation formula is:
3
Wpw= {(I5V 5) + (I15V 15) + (I24V 24)}(W)
7
I5V : Current consumption of 5VDC logic circuit of each module
I15V: Current consumption of 15VDC external power supply part of special function
module
I24V: Average current consumption of 24VDC power supply for internal consumption
of the output module
(Current consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
Not applicable to a system where 24VDC is supplied externally and a power
supply module which does not have a 24VDC output is used.
(2) Total power consumption of each module at 5VDC logic part

Power of the 5VDC output circuit of the power supply module is the power
consumption of each module.
W5V=I5V 5(W)
8-7
(3) Total 24VDC average power consumption of the output module (power consumption
equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
Average power of the 24VDC output circuit of the power supply module is the total
power consumption of each module.
W24V=I24V 24(W)
(4) Total 24VDC average power consumption of the output module

(power consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
WOUT=IOUT Vdrop Output points Simultaneous ON ratio (W)
IOUT : Output current (current actually used) (A)

Vdrop : Voltage drop of each output module (V)
(5) Average power consumption of the input modules at the input part (power
consumption equivalent to the points simultaneously ON)
WIN=IIN E Input points Simultaneous ON (W)
IIN : Input current (effective value in the case of AC) (A)

E : Input voltage (voltage for actual usage) (V)
(6) Power consumption of the external power supply part of the special function module
WS=I+15V 15 + I-15V 15 + I24V 24(W)
The total of the power consumption calculated for each block as above is the power
consumption of the programmable controller system as a whole.
W=WPW + W5V + W24V + WOUT + WIN + WS (W)
Calculate the amount of heat generation and temperature rise inside the panel from
the total power consumption (W).
Simplified calculation formula to obtain temperature rise inside panel is shown next:
W
T= [ ]
U
W: Power consumption of the programmable controller system as a whole (the value
obtained above)
A: Inside surface area of the panel [m2]
U: When inside temperature of the panel is kept constant by a fan, etc............6
When the air inside the panel is not circulated .............................................4
POINT
When the temperature rise inside the panel exceeds the specified range, it is
recommended to lower the temperature inside the panel by installing a heat
exchanger to the panel.
If a conventional ventilation fan is used, it sucks dust along with the outside air,
which may affect the programmable controller, so care must be taken.
8-8
8.4 Installing the Base Units
Precautions concerning installation of the main base unit and extension base unit are
described next.
8.4.1 Precautions when installing programmable controller
Precautions concerning the installation of programmable controller to the panel, etc. are
explained below.
(1) To improve the ventilation and to facilitate the exchange of the module, provide at
least 30mm (1.18inch) of distance between the top part of the module and any
structure or part.
However, when A52B, A55B, A58B, A62B, A65B or A68B extension base unit is
used, provide at least 80mm (3.15inch) of distance between the top of the unit and
any structural part.
(2) Do not install vertically or horizontally, because of concerns with ventilation.
(3) If there are any protrusions, dents or distortion on the installation surface of the base
unit, an excessive force is applied to the printed-circuit board and causes problems,
so, install to a flat surface.
(4) Avoid sharing the same panel with any source of vibration such as a large-sized
magnetic contactor or no-fuse breaker, and install to a separate panel or away from
such devices.
(5) Provide wiring ducts as necessary.

However, when the clearance of the top and bottom of the programmable controller
are smaller than those shown in figure 8.1, pay attention to the following:
(a) When installing to the top of programmable controller, to improve the ventilation,
keep the height of the duct to 50mm (1.97inch) or below.
In addition, the distance from the top of the programmable controller should be
sufficient for tightening and loosening works for the mounting screws on the top
of the module.
The module cannot be replaced if the screws on the top of the module cannot be
loosened or tightened.
(b) When installing to the bottom part of the programmable controller, provide a
sufficient space so that the 100/200VAC input line of the power supply module, I/
O wires of I/O modules and 12/24VDC lines are not affected.
(6) If any device is installed in front of the programmable controller (i.e. installed in the
back of the door), position it to secure at least 100mm (3.94inch) of distance to avoid
the effects of radiated noise and heat.
Also, keep at least 50mm (1.97inch) distance from the base unit to any device placed
on right or left or the unit.
(7) When installing the base unit to DIN rail in an environment with large vibration, use a
vibration-proofing bracket (A1S-PLT-D). Mounting the vibration-proofing bracket
(A1S-PLT-D) enhances the resistance to vibration.
However, the A1SJHCPU-S8 cannot use a vibration-proofing bracket(A1S-PLT-D).
Depending on the environment to set up the base unit, it is also recommended to fix
the base unit to the control panel directly.
8-9
8.4.2 Installation
Installation location of the main base unit and the extension base unit is shown below.
Indicates the location of ceiling of

the panel, wiring duct or other part.
30mm (1.18inch)
Main base Extension base or more
30mm (1.18inch)
or more
Figure8.1 Parallel installation
panel's ceiling, wiring duct, or

components.
30mm
Main base 30mm (1.18inch) or more Main base (1.18inch) or more
Duct (Height of
50mm (1.97inch)
30mm (1.18inch) or more 30mm

(1.18inch) or more
30mm (1.18inch) or more 80mm

(3.15inch) or more
Extension base unit
(A1S5 B(S1),
A1S6 B(S1)) Duct (Height of
50mm (1.97inch)
or less)
30mm (1.18inch) or more

Extension base unit 80mm
(A5 B(S1), A1S B(S1)) (3.15inch) or more
Figure8.2 Series installation
Panel, etc.
Programmable
controller
Door
Contactor
relay, etc.
100mm (3.94 inch) or more
Figure8.3 Distance between the front

Figure8.5 Horizontal installation
face of the programmable Figure8.4 Vertical installation (not allowed)
(not allowed)
controller and other devices
8 - 10
8.5 Installation and Removal of the Base Units
How to install and remove the power supply module, CPU module, I/O module and special
function module, etc. to/from the base unit are explained.
Insert the module fixing projection into the fixing hole in the base unit and then tighten
CAUTION the module fixing screw within the specified torque.
When no screw is tightened, even if the module is installed correctly, it may cause
malfunctions, a failure or a drop of the module.
Filure to do so may damage the module.
8 - 11
(1) Module installation

Installation procedure of the module is explained.
Base unit
Module
Module
connector
Insert the module fixing projection
of the module into the module fixing
hole.
Install the module to the base unit

by pushing it in the direction of the
Projection
arrow. for fixing
the module
Module fixing hole
Confirm that the module is firmly

inserted to the base unit, then
fix it with the module fixed screw.
Complete
8 - 12
(2) Removal of the module

Removal procedure of the module is explained.
Base unit
Remove the module installation

screw, then pull out the top of the
module while using the bottom of
the module as the fulcrum.
Module
connector
While lifting the module upward,

Module
disengage the module fixing
projection from the module fixing
hole.
Module fixing hole
Complete
POINT
To remove the module, the module mounting screw must be removed first, then
disengage the module fixing projection from the module fixing hole. If the module
is forcibly removed the module fixing projection will be damaged.
8 - 13
8.6 Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover
DANGER If any slot is left empty, be sure to use a blank cover (A1SG60) or a dummy module
(A1SG62) for it.
When using the extension base unit, A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1), attach
the included dustproof cover to the module in slot 0.
Otherwise, internal parts of the module may be flied in the short circuit test or when an
overcurrent or overvoltage is accidentally applied to the external I/O section.
When A1S52B(S1), A1S55B(S1), A1S58B(S1) is used, it is necessary to install the

dustproof cover, which is supplied with base to the I/O module to be installed to the left end
in order to prevent intrusion of foreign material into the I/O module. Intrusion of foreign
matter into the I/O module may cause breakdowns. Procedures for installing and removing
the dustproof cover are described below.
(1) Installation
I/O module
Dust-proof cover
To insert the dustproof cover to the I/O module, insert the cover to the connector or
terminal side first as shown in the figure, then push the cover to the I/O module side.
8 - 14
(2) Removal
I/O module
Hole for removal
Dust-proof cover
To remove the dustproof cover from the I/O module, insert the tip of a flat-tip
screwdriver into the removal hole as shown in the figure, then move the screwdriver
towards the rear of the module to separate the clip from the removal hole and remove
the cover.
8 - 15
8.7 Wiring
8.7.1 Wiring instructions
Instructions for wiring the power cable and I/O wire.
Be sure to shut off all the phases of the external power supply used by the system
DANGER before wiring.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock or damage of the product.
Before energizing and operating the system after wiring, be sure to attach the
terminal cover supplied with the product.
Failure to do so may cause an electric shock.
Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground connector.

CAUTION Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions.
Wire the module correctly after confirming the rated voltage and terminal layout.
Connecting a power supply of a different voltage rating or incorrect wiring may cause
a fire or failure.
The power supply modules may be heated, resulting in a fire or failure.
Press, crimp or properly solder the connector for external connection with the
specified tool.
Incomplete connection may cause a short circuit, fire or malfunctions.
Tighten terminal screws within the specified torque range.
If the screw is too loose, it may cause a short circuit, fire or malfunctions.
Carefully prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module.
Failure to do so may cause a fire, failure or malfunctions.
Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use.
Wire the main power supply to the power supply module installed in a control panel
through a distribution terminal block.
Furthermore, the wiring and replacement of a power supply module have to be
performed by a maintenance worker who acquainted with shock protection.
(For the wiring methods, refer to Section 8.7.)
(1) Wiring power supply

(a) When voltage fluctuations are larger than the specified value, connect a
constant-voltage transformer.
Constant
Programmable
voltage
controller
transformer
8 - 16
(b) Use a power supply which generates minimal noise between wires and between
the programmable controller and ground.
If excessive noise is generated, connect an isolating transformer.
Programmable I/O
controller equipment
Insulation Insulation
transformer transformer
(c) When a power supply transformer or isolating transformer is employed to reduce

the voltage from 200VAC to 100VAC, use one with a capacity greater than those
indicated in the following table.
Power Supply Transformer

Module Capacity
n: Stands for the number of power supply

A1S61PN 110VA n
modules.
A1S62PN 110VA n
(d) Separate the programmable controller's power supply line from the lines for I/O
equipments and power equipments as shown below.
When there is much noise, connect an isolating transformer.
(e) Taking rated current or inrush current into consideration when wiring the power
supply, be sure to connect a breaker or an external fuse that have proper blown
and detection.
When using a single programmable controller, a 10A breaker or an external fuse
are recommended for wiring protection.
Programmable Insulation
Main controller Transformer
power supply power supply
Programmable
200VAC controller
Relay
terminal block T1
I/O power supply
I/O equipment
Main circuit
power supply
Main circuit equipment

On a control panel
8 - 17
(f) Note on using the 24VDC output of the A1S62PN power supply module.

CAUTION The power supply modules may be heated, resulting in a fire or failure.
If the 24VDC output capacity is insufficient for one power supply module, supply
24VDC from the external 24VDC power supply as shown below:
(g) 100VAC, 200VAC and 24VDC wires should be twisted as dense as possible.
Connect the modules with a shortest distance.
Also, to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum, use thickest wires possible
(maximum 2mm2 (0.0031in.2)).
(h) Do not bind 100VAC and 24VDC wires together with main circuit (high voltage
and large current) wires or I/O signal lines (including common line) nor place
them near each other. Provide 100mm (3.94inch) clearance between the wires if
possible.
(i) As measures against surge due to lightening, connect a surge absorber for
lightening as shown below.
Programmable
AC controller I/O
devices
E1 E1 E2
E1 surge absorber for

lightening
8 - 18
POINT
(1) Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening (E1) from that of the
programmable controller (E2).
(2) Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does not
exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even when line voltage is
maximum.
(2) Wiring I/O equipments
Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit
CAUTION or power lines, or bring them close to each other.
(a) The applicable wire size for a terminal block connector is 0.75 to 2mm2 . It is
recommended to use wire of 0.75mm2 for easy use.
(b) Run the input line and output line away from each other.
(c) Run the I/O signal line (including common line) away from the main circuit line
with high voltage or large current by more than 100mm (3.94inch).
(d) When the main circuit line and power line cannot be separated, use a batch
shielding cable and ground it on the programmable controller side.
However, ground it on the opposite side in some cases.
(e) When cables are run through pipes, securely ground the pipes.
(f) Separate the 24VDC I/O wires from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines.
(g) With a long distance wiring of 200m (656.2ft.) or longer, leak current due to line
capacity may cause troubles.
(h) As a measure against surge due to lightning, separate the AC wiring and DC
wiring and connect a surge absorber for lightning as shown in (i) of item (1).
Failure to do so increases the risk of I/O equipment failure due to lightning.
8 - 19
(3) Grounding
Always ground the FG and LG terminals to the protective ground connector.

CAUTION Failure to do so may cause an electric shock or malfunctions.
(a) Carry out the independent grounding if possible.

(b) If the independent grounding is impossible, carry out the shared grounding (2) as
shown below.
Programmable Programmable Programmable

Other device Other device Other device
controller controller controller
(1) Independent grounding ......... Best (2) Shared grounding ......... Good (3) Common grounding ......... Not allowed
(c) Use the cable of 2mm2 (0.0031in.2) or more for grounding.

Set the grounding point closer to the programmable controller to make the
grounding cable short as possible.
(d) If a malfunction occurs due to grounding, separate either LG or FG of the base
unit, the device combination, or all the connection from the grounding.
8 - 20
8.7.2 Wiring to module terminals
This section explains the wiring of power cables and ground wires to the main and
extension bases.
Main base unit (A1S38B) Main base unit (A1S38B)

100/110VAC 100/110VAC
200/240VAC A1S61PN CPU 200/240VAC A1S62PN CPU
AC AC
Fuse NC Fuse +24V

NC 24G
(FG) AC (FG)
AC
DC DC
24VDC (LG)
(LG)
24VDC 24VDC
INPUT INPUT
100-240VAC 100-240VAC
Connect to the 24VDC Connect to the 24VDC

terminals of an I/O terminals of an I/O
module that requires module that requires
Extension base unit (A1S58B) Extension base unit (A1S68B)
24VDC internally. 24VDC internally.
I/O I/O A1S62PN I/O
Extension cable Extension cable
+24V
24G
(FG)
100/240VAC (LG)
FG INPUT
100-240VAC
Grounding wire Grounding wire
Ground Ground
8 - 21
POINT
(1) Use the thickest possible (max. 2 mm2 (14 AWG)) wires for the 100/200 VAC
and 24 VDC power cables. Be sure to twist these wires starting at the
connection terminals. For wiring a terminal block, be sure to use a solderless
terminal. To prevent short-circuit due to loosening screws, use the solderless
terminals with insulation sleeves of 0.8 mm (0.03 inch) or less thick. The
number of the solderless terminals to be connected for one terminal block are
limited to 2.
Solderless terminals Terminal block
with insulation sleeves
(2) Be sure to ground the LG and FG terminals.Failure to do so may cause the

programmable controller to be susceptible to noise. Note that LG terminals
include the potential as half as that of input voltage; you might get an electric
shock when you touch them.
(3) A1S61PN and A1S62PN do not need to be switched as the are 100 to
240VAC wide-range.
8 - 22
8.8 Precautions when Connecting the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Connect the programmable controller system to the uninterruptible power supply (UPS),
while paying attention to the followings.
Use the on-line UPS or line interactive UPS (voltage distortion of 5% or less.)
Alternatively, use the off-line system UPS, i.e., FREQUPS-F series with serial number P or
later (manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric). Example: FW-F10-03.K/0.5K
Do not use the off-line system UPS other than above.
8 - 23
9. EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES
9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES

The product sold in the European countries have been required by law to comply with the
EMC and Low Voltage Directives of the EU Directives since 1996 and 1997, respectively.
The manufacturers must confirm by self-declaration that their products meet the
requirements of these directives, and put the CE mark on the products.
9.1 Requirements for Compliance with EMC Directives
The EMC Directives specifies emission and immunity criteria and requires the products to
meet both of them, i.e., not to emit excessive electromagnetic interference (emission): to
be immune to electromagnetic interference outside (immunity). Guidelines for complying
the machinery including MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller with the EMC
Directives are provided in Section 9.1.1 to Section 9.1.7 below.
The guidelines are created based on the requirements of the regulations and relevant
standards, however, they do not guarantee that the machinery constructed according to
them will not comply with the Directives. Therefore, the manufacturer of the machinery
must finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives: if it is actually
compliant with the EMC Directives.
9.1.1 EMC standards
Standards related to EMC directive are described below.
Specifications Test Item Test Description Standard Values

30 M-230 M Hz QP :
EN55011 *2 Measure the emission released by 30 dB V/m (30 m measurement) *1
Radiated noise the product. 230 M-1000 M Hz QP :
EN61000-6-4 30 dB V/m (30 m measurement) *1
(2001) 150k-500kHz QP:
EN55011 *2 Measure the emission released by 79dB, Mean : 66 dB *1
Conduction noise the product to the power line. 500 K-30MHz QP :
73dB, Mean: 60 dB*1
*2 Immunity test by applying static 4kV contact discharge
EN61000-4-2
Static electricity immunity electricity to the device enclosure. 8kV air discharge
Immunity test by applying burst
EN61000-4-4*2 2kV Power line
noise to the power line and signal
First transient burst noise 1kV Signal line
EN61131-2/A12 line.
(2000) Immunity test in which a damped
EN61000-4-12*2
oscillatory wave is superimposed on 1kV
Damped oscillatory wave
the power line.
EN61000-4-3*2 Immunity test by applying aradiated
10V/m, 26-1000MHz
Radiated electromagnetic field electric field to the product.
Immunity test by inducting an
EN61000-6-2 EN61000-4-6*2
electromagnetic field in the power 10V, 0.15-80MHz
(2001) Conduction noise
line and signal line.
*1 QP: Quasi-peak value, Mean : Average value
*2 The programmable controller is an open type device (device installed to another device) and
must be installed in a conductive control panel. The tests for the corresponding items were
performed while the programmable controller was installed inside the control panel.
9-1
9.1.2 Installation instructions for EMC directive
The programmable controller is open equipment and must be installed within a control
panel for use.* This not only ensures safety but also ensues effective shielding of
programmable controller-generated electromagnetic noise.
* Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel.
However, the waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
(1) Control panel

(a) Use a conductive control panel.
(b) When attaching the control panel's top plate or base plate, mask painting and
weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate.
(c) To ensure good electrical contact with the control panel, mask the paint on the
installation bolts of the inner plate in the control panel so that contact between
surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area.
(d) Earth the control panel with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to
ground can be ensured even at high frequencies.
(e) Holes made in the control panel must be 10cm (3.94inch) diameter or less. If the
holes are 10cm (3.94inch) or larger, radio wave may be emitted.
(f) Lock the control panel so that only those who are trained and have acquired
enough knowledge of electric facilities can open the control panel.
(2) Connection of power cable and ground wires

Earthing and power supply cable for the programmable controller system must be
connected as described below.
(a) Provide a grounding point near the power supply module. Earth the power
supply's LG and FG terminals (LG : Line Ground, FG : Frame Ground) with the
thickest and shortest wire possible. (The wire length must be 30cm (11.18inch)
or shorter.) The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in
the programmable controller system to the ground, so an impedance that is as
low as possible must be ensured.
In addition, make sure to wire the ground cable short as the wires are used to
relieve the noise, the wire itself carries large noise content and thus short wiring
means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna.
(b) The ground wire led from the grounding point must be twisted with the power
cables. By twisting with the ground wire, noise flowing from the power cables can
be relieved to the earthing. However, if a filter is installed on the power cables,
the wires and the ground wire may not need to be twisted.
9-2
9.1.3 Cables
The cables pulled out of the control panel contain a high frequency noise component. On
the outside of the control panel, therefore, they serve as antennas to emit noise. Ensure to
use shielded cables for the cables, which are connected to the I/O modules, special
function modules and those pulled out to outside of the control panel.
Mounting ferrite core is not required except some types of CPU however, noise emanated
via the cable can be restrained using it.
The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance. The signal lines (including
common line) connected to the programmable controller I/O modules and special function
modules use shielded cables to assure noise resistance, as a condition, standardized on
EN61131-2/A12(2000). If a shielded cable is not used or not earthed correctly, the noise
resistance will be less than the specified value.
(1) Earthing of shielded cables

(a) Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the control panel as possible
taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the
cable to be earthed.
(b) Take appropriate measures so that the shield section of the shielded cable from
which the outer sheath cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the
control panel on an increased contact surface. A clamp may also be used as
shown in the figure below. In this case, however, apply a cover to the painted
inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp.
Note) The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the
shielded cable as shown below is not recommended. The high
frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective.
9-3
(2) MELSECNET (II) and MELSECNET/10 modules

(a) Use a double-shielded coaxial cable (MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES, LTD.:
5C-2V-CCY) for the MELSECNET modules (such as A1SJ71AR21,
A1SJ71LR21, A1SJ71BR11) which uses coaxial cables. Noise in the range of 30
MHz or higher in radiated noise can be suppressed by the use of double-
shielded coaxial cables. Earth the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting
its outer shield to the ground.
Refer to (1) for the earthing of the shield.
(b) Ensure to attach a ferrite core to the double-shielded coaxial cable connected to
the MELSECNET module. In addition, position the ferrite core on each cable
near the outlet of the control panel. TDK-make ZCAT3035 ferrite core is
recommended.
(3) Ethernet module

Precautions to be followed when AUI cables, twisted pair cables and coaxial cables
are used are described below.
(a) Ensure to earth also the AUI cables*1 connected to the 10BASE5 connectors of
the A1SJ71E71-B5. Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type, as shown in
the figure below, partly remove the outer cover of it, and earth the exposed shield
section to the ground on the widest contact surface.
(b) Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables*1 connected to the
10BASE-T connectors. For the shielded twisted pair cables, strip part of the
outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest
contact surface as shown below.

*1 Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT2032 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
9-4
(c) Always use double-shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables*2 connected to
the 10BASE2 connectors. Earth the double-shielded coaxial cable by connecting
its outer shield to the ground.

*2 Make sure to install a ferrite core for the cable.
As a ferrite core, ZCAT3035 manufactured by TDK is recommended.
Ethernet is the registered trademark of XEROX, Co.,LTD
(4) I/O and other communication cables

For the I/O signal lines (including common line) and other communication cables
(RS-232, RS-422, etc), if extracted to the outside of the control panel, also ensure to
earth the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item (1)
above.
(5) Positioning Modules

Precautions to be followed when the machinery conforming to the EMC Directive is
configured using the A1SD75P -S3 are described below.
(a) When wiring with a 2m (6.56ft.) or less cable
• Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp.
(Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring
connector.)
• Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the
minimum distance of cable.
• Install the drive unit in the same panel.
9-5
(b) When wiring with cable that exceeds 2m (6.56ft.), but is 10m (32.81ft.) or less
• Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp.
(Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring
connector.)
• Install a ferrite core.
• Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the
minimum distance of cable.
(c) Ferrite core and cable clamp types and required quantities
• Cable clamp
Type : AD75CK (Manufactured by Mitsubishi Electric)
• Ferrite core
Type : ZCAT3035-1330 (TDK ferrite core)
Contact: TDK Corporation
• Required quantity
Required Qty
Cable length Prepared part
1 axis 2 axes 3 axes
Within 2m (6.56ft.) AD75CK 1 1 1
AD75CK 1 1 1
2m (6.56ft.) to 10m (32.81ft.)
ZCAT3035-1330 1 2 3
(d) Cable clamp mounting position
Inside control panel
A1SD75
20 to 30cm
(7.87 to 11.81inch)
AD75CK
9-6
(6) CC-Link Module

(a) Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC-Link module
close to the exit of control panel or to any of the CC-Link stations within 30cm
(11.81inch) from the module or stations.
The CC-Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable. As shown in the illustration
below, remove a portion of the outer covering and ground as large a surface
area of the exposed shield part as possible.
(b) Always use the specified CC-Link dedicated cable.

(c) The CC-Link module, the CC-Link stations and the FG line inside the control
panel should be connected the FG terminal as shown in the diagram below.
[Simplified diagram]
(d) Power line connecting to the external power supply terminal (compliant with I/O
power port of CE standard) should be 30m (98.43 ft.) or less. Power line
connecting to module power supply terminal (compliant with I/O power port of
CE standard) should be 10m (32.81 ft.) or less.
(e) A power line connecting to the analog input of the following modules should be
30cm or less.
• AJ65BT-64RD3
• AJ65BT-64RD4
• AJ65BT-68TD
(7) Measures against static electricity

When using an insulation displacement connector without connector cover, a
connected cable for the connector is thin in applicable wire size and coating.
Therefore, note that the module may cause an electric discharge failure.
As measures against the failure, using pressure-displacement type connector whose
applicable wire size is thick or soldering type connector is recommended.
9-7
9.1.4 Power supply module
The precautions required for each power supply module are described below. Always
observe the items noted as precautions.
Model Precautions
A1S61PN, A1S62PN Make sure to short-circuit and ground the LG and FG terminals.*2
Use the 24VDC panel power supply equipment conforming to the EU
A1S63P *1
Directive.
A1SJHCPU(S8) Make sure to short and ground the LG and FG terminals.*2
*1 If sufficient filter circuitry is built into the 24VDC external power supply module, the noise
generated by A1S63P will be absorbed by that filter circuit, so a line filter may not be required.
Filtering circuitry of version F or later of A1S63P is improved so that a external line filter is not
required.
*2 To ensure the compliance with CE (EN6111-21/A11), make sure to short-circuit the LG and
FG terminals using a wire of 6 to 7cm (2.36 to 2.76inch).
9.1.5 Ferrite core
Use of ferrite cores is effective in reducing the conduction noise in the band of about
10MHz and radiated noise in 30 to 100MHz band.
It is recommended to attach ferrite cores when the shield of the shielded cable coming out
of control panel does not work effectively, or when emission of the conduction noise from
the power supply line has to be suppressed.*1The ferrite cores used in our tests are TDK's
ZCAT3035.
It should be noted that the ferrite cores should be fitted to the cables in the position
immediately before they are pulled out of the enclosure. If the fitting position is improper,
the ferrite will not produce any effect.
*1 To response with CE(EN61131-2/A12), make sure to mount 2 or more ferrite cores onto the
power supply line.
The mounting position should be as near the power supply module as possible.
Use the following ferrite core.
Ferrite core
Type : ZCAT2235-1030A (TDK ferrite core)
Contact: TDK Corporation
9-8
9.1.6 Noise filter (power supply line filter)
A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise. With the exception
of some models, it is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply line, but fitting it
can further suppress noise. (The noise filter has the effect of reducing conducted noise of
10 M Hz or less.)Use any of the following noise filters (double type filters) or equivalent.
Model name FN343-3/01 FN660-6/06 ZHC2203-11

Manufacturer SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER TDK
Rated current 3A 6A 3A
Rated voltage 250V
The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below.
(1) Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter. When
bundled, the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the
noise was filtered.
(a) The noise will be induced when the input and output
(b) Separate and lay the input and output wires.
wires are bundled.
(2) Earth the noise filter ground terminal to the control panel with the shortest wire
possible (approx. 10cm (3.94inch)).
9.1.7 Power line for external power supply terminal
The power line connecting to the external power supply terminal of the module should be
30m (98.43 ft.) or less.
9-9
9.2 Requirements for Compliance with Low Voltage Directives
The Low Voltage Directives apply to the electrical equipment operating from 50 to
1000VAC or 75 to 1500VDC; the manufacturer must ensure the adequate safety of the
equipment.
Guidelines for installation and wiring of MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller are
provided in 9.2.1 to Section 9.2.7 for the purpose of compliance with the EMC Directives.
The guidelines are created based on the requirements of the regulations and relevant
standards, however, they do not guarantee that the machinery constructed according to
them will comply with the Directives. Therefore, the manufacturer of the machinery must
finally determine how to make it comply with the EMC Directives: if it is actually compliant
with the EMC Directives.
9.2.1 Standard applied for MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller
The standard applied for MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller series is

EN61010-1 safety of devices used in measurement rooms, control rooms, or laboratories.
For the modules which operate with the rated voltage of 50VAC/75VDC or above, we have
developed new models that conform to the above standard.
For the modules which operate with the rated voltage under 50VAC/75VDC, the
conventional models can be used, because they are out of the low voltage directive
application range.
9.2.2 Precautions when using the MELSEC-AnS series programmable controller
Module selection
(1) Power supply module

For a power supply module with rated input voltage of 100/200VAC, select a model in
which the internal part between the first order and second order is intensively
insulated, because it generates hazardous voltage (voltage of 42.4V or more at the
peak) area.
For a power supply module with 24VDC rated input, a conventional model can be
used.
(2) I/O module

For I/O module with rated I/O voltage of 100/200VAC, select a model in which the
internal area between the first order and second order is intensively insulated,
because it has hazardous voltage area.
For I/O module with 24VDC rated input, a conventional model can be used.
(3) CPU module, memory cassette, base unit

Conventional models can be used for these modules, because they only have a
5VDC circuit inside.
(4) Special function module

Conventional models can be used for the special function modules including analog
module, network module, and positioning module, because the rated voltage is
24VDC or smaller.
(5) Display device

Use the CE-marked product.
9 - 10
9.2.3 Power supply
The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming
installation category II. Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the
programmable controller.
The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by
a thunderbolt. Category I has the lowest durability; category IV has the highest durability.
Category IV Category III Category II Category

Figure9.1: Installation Category
Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more
levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution.
9 - 11
9.2.4 Control panel
Because the programmable controller is an open device (a device designed to be stored

within another device), be sure to use it after storing in the control panel.*
* Also, each network remote station needs to be installed inside the control panel. However, the
waterproof type remote station can be installed outside the control panel.
(1) Shock protection

In order to prevent persons who are not familiar with the electric facility such as the
operators from electric shocks, the control panel must have the following functions :
(a) The control panel must be equipped with a lock so that only the personnel who
has studied about the electric facility and have enough knowledge can open it.
(b) The control panel must have a structure which automatically stops the power
supply when the box is opened.
(c) For electric shock protection, use IP20 or greater control panel.
(2) Dustproof and waterproof features

The control panel also has the dustproof and waterproof functions. Insufficient
dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage, resulting in
insulation destruction. The insulation in our programmable controller is designed to
cope with the pollution level 2, so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or
below.
Pollution level 1: An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not
exist.
Pollution level 2: An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist,
but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the
accumulated dust. Generally, this is the level for inside the
control panel equivalent to IP54 in a control room or on the floor
of a typical factory.
Pollution level 3: An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity
may be generated due to the accumulated dust.
An environment for a typical factory floor.
Pollution level 4: Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain, snow, etc. An
outdoor environment.
As shown above, the programmable controller can realize the pollution level 2 when
stored in a control panel equivalent to IP54.
9 - 12
9.2.5 Module installation
(1) Installing modules contiguously

In AnS series programmable controllers, the left side of each I/O module is left open.
When installing an I/O module to the base, do not make any empty slots between any
two modules. If there is an empty slot on the left side of a module with 100/200VAC
rating, the circuit board which contains the hazardous voltage circuit becomes bare.
When it is unavoidable to make an empty slot, be sure to install the blank module
(A1SG60).
When using the A1S5 B(S1) extension base with no power supply, attach the cover
packaged with the extension base to the side of the leftmost module.
9.2.6 Grounding
There are two kinds of ground terminals as shown below. Either ground terminal must be
used grounded.
Be sure to ground the protective grounding for the safety reasons.
Protective grounding : Maintains the safety of the programmable controller and

improves the noise resistance.
Functional grounding : Improves the noise resistance.
9.2.7 External wiring
(1) Module power supply and external power supply

For the remote module which requires 24VDC as module power supply,
the 5/12/24/48VDC I/O module, and the special function module which requires the
external power supply, use the 5/12/24/48VDC circuit which is doubly insulated from
the hazardous voltage circuit or use the power supply whose insulation is reinforced.
(2) External devices

When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the
programmable controller, use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the
programmable controller is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit.
(3) Intensive insulation

Intensive insulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage shown
in the following table.
Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage (Installation Category II, source : IEC664)
Rated voltage of hazardous Surge withstand voltage

voltage area (1.2/50 s)
150VAC or below 2500V
300VAC or below 4000V
9 - 13
10. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
Do not touch any terminal during power distribution.

DANGER Doing so may cause an electric shock.
Properly connect batteries.
Do not charge, disassemble, heat or throw them into the fire and do not make them
short-circuited and soldered. Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries
or a fire due to exothermic heat, burst and/or ignition.
cleaning or retightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws.
Failure to do so may result in an electric shock.
If they are too loose, it may cause a short circuit or malfunctions.
If too tight, it may damage the screw and/or module, resulting in a drop of the module,
a short circuit or malfunctions.
When performing online operations (especially, program modification, forced output

CAUTION or operating status change) by connecting a peripheral device to the running CPU
module, read the manual carefully and ensure the safety.
Incorrect operation will cause mechanical damage or accidents.
Do not disassemble or modify each of modules.
Doing so may cause failure, malfunctions, personal injuries and/or a fire.
When using a wireless communication device such as a mobile phone, keep a
distance of 25cm (9.84inch) or more from the programmable controller in all
directions.
Failure to do so may cause malfunctions.
Failure to do so may result in failure or malfunctions of the module.
Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery.
Doing so may damage the battery, resulting in electrolyte spillage inside the battery.
If any impact has been applied, discard the battery and never use it.
Before handling modules, touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static
electricity from the human body.
Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunctions of the module.
In order to use the programmable controller always in good condition, conducting daily
and periodical maintenance/inspection on the following items are strongly recommended.
10 - 1
10.1 Daily Inspection
Dairy inspection items recommended are shown in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1 Dairy inspection
Item Check item Content of inspection Judgement Action
Confirm if mounting
Installation condition of
1 screws are not loose or It is installed securely. Retighten the screw.
the base unit
cover is not detached.
Confirm if the module The module mounting

Installation condition of Tighten the module
2 mounting screw is firmly screws are firmly
the I/O modules mounting screw firmly.
tightened. tightened.
Loosening of terminal Retighten the terminal

No loosening.
screw screw.
Proximity of solderless There is an

Correct the distance.
3 Connection conditions terminals appropriate distance.
Retighten the
Connector areas of No loosening at
connector fixing
extension cable connectors.
screw.
The LED is ON.

POWER LED Confirm it is ON. Per Section 11.2.2.
(Faulty if it is OFF.)
The LED is ON.

Confirm it is ON in the Section 11.2.3
"RUN" LED (Faulty if it is OFF or
"RUN" state. Per Section 11.2.4.
flickering.)
The LED is OFF.

Confirm it is ON at error Section 11.2.5
"ERROR" LED (ON when error has
LEDs on the main module
occurrence. Per Section 11.2.6.

occurred.)
The LED is ON when

4 input is ON,
Confirm if it correctly and OFF when input
Input LED Per Section 11.4.1.
turns on and off. is OFF.
(Faulty other than the
above.)
The LED is ON when

output is ON,
Confirm if it correctly and OFF when output
Output LED Per Section 11.4.2.
turns on and off. is OFF.
(Faulty other than the
above.)
10 - 2
10.2 Periodic Inspection
Inspection on items shown below should be conducted once or twice every six months to a
year. Conduct the inspection when the equipment is moved or modified, or wiring is
changed.
Table 10.2 Periodic inspection
Item Check item Content of inspection Judgement Action

Ambient environment
Ambient temperature 0 to 55
Measure with
When used in a panel,
Ambient humidity temperature and humidity 10 to 90%RH
temperature inside
1 gauge.
the panel is the
Measure presence of There is no corrosive
Atmosphere ambient temperature.
corrosive gasses. gas present.
Measure voltage
Change the power
2 Line voltage check between 100/200VAC 85 to 264VAC
supply.
terminals.
Installation condition
Test by moving the Must be installed

Loosening, backlash Retighten the screw.
module. solidly.
3
Adhesion of dirt or
Visual inspection No adhesion. Remove and clean.
foreign matters
Loosening of terminal Retighten with a

No loosening. Retighten.
Connection conditions
screw screwdriver.
Proximity of There is an
Visual inspection Correct the distance.
4 solderless terminals appropriate distance.
Retighten the
Loosening of
Visual inspection No loosening. connector fixing
connector
screw.
Confirm M9006 or M9007 Even when there is no

is OFF with a peripheral (Preventive low-battery display,
5 Battery
device in the monitoring maintenance) replace if specified life
mode. is exceeded.
10 - 3
10.3 Battery Replacement
Properly connect batteries.Do not charge, disassemble, heat or throw them into the
DANGER fire and do not make them short-circuited and soldered.
Incorrect battery handling may cause personal injuries or a fire due to exothermic
heat, burst and/or ignition.
M9006 or M9007 is turned ON when voltage of the battery for backing up programs and
power failure compensation function drops. Even though programs and contents of power
failure compensation function are not erased immediately when these special relays
become ON, the contents could be erased if the ON-status of the special relay fails to be
recognized.
Replace the battery while the total period of power failure is less than shown in Table 10.3
from when the M9006 or M9007 is turned ON.
Yardstick for battery life and the specifics of replacement are explained below.
10.3.1 Battery life
(1) The battery life is shown in Table 10.3 when using a software version CPU module.
For software version check, refer to Section 4.5.1.
There is no difference of battery life in the A2SHCPU depending on versions.
• A1SJHCPU: Hardware version R or later
• A1SJHCPU-S8: Hardware version H or later
• A1SHCPU: Hardware version H or later
Table10.3 Battery life
Battery Life*5
Actual Value (TYP)*3 After Turning ON

CPU Module Current-carrying M9006 or M9007
Model Name *1 Guaranteed (Power failure
Hour Rate Ambient Ambient
Value*2 compensation time
Temperature Temperature
after alarm
40 25
occurrence*4)
4,000 hr 24,500hr 27,000hr 100hr

0%
0.4 years 2.8 years 3.1 years 4 days
5,700 hr 35,000hr 38,500hr 100hr

30%
A1SJHCPU(S8)
8,000hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr
50%
0.9 years 5 years 5 years 4 days
43,800hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

100%
5 years 5 years 5 years 4 days
10 - 4
Table10.3 Battery life
Battery Life*5

Guaranteed (Power failure
Model Name Hour Rate*1 Ambient Ambient
after alarm
40 25
occurrence*4)
4,000 hr 24,500hr 27,000hr 100hr

0%
5,700 hr 35,000hr 38,500hr 100hr

30%
A1SHCPU
8,000hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr
50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

100%
4,000 hr 24,500hr 27,000hr 100hr

0%
5,700 hr 35,000hr 38,500hr 100hr

30%
A2SHCPU(S1)
8,000hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr
50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

100%
*1 Indicates hour rate per day (24hr) at programmable controller power ON.
(Total hour at power ON: 12hr, total hour at power OFF: 12hr become 50% each for current-
carrying hour rate)
*2 Indicates the total power failure time we guarantee , whose range is within -25 to 75 on
storage ambient temperature (0 to 55 on operating ambient temperature), based on the
memory (SRAM) characteristic value provided by the parts manufacturer.
*3 Indicates the total power failure time within 40 , 25 on storage ambient temperature,
which is calculated base on our actual measurement value.An actual value varies according
to parts characteristics. Take some sorts of reference to these values.
*4 In the case of the following, power failure compensation time after power supply is turned off
is 10 min.
A battery connecter is disconnected.
A battery lead wire is disconnected.
*5 Available period of the battery (maximum lifetime) is 5 years (43,800hr).
10 - 5
(2) The battery life is shown in Table 10.4 when using a software version CPU module.
For software version check, refer to Section 4.5.1.
• A1SJHCPU: Hardware version Q or earlier
• A1SJHCPU-S8 Hardware version G or earlier
• A1SHCPU: Hardware version G or earlier
Table 10.4 Battery life when using earlier version CPU.
Battery Life*5

Guaranteed (Power failure
Model Name Hour Rate*1 Ambient Ambient
after alarm
40 25
occurrence*4)
4,000 hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

0%
0.4 years 5 years 5 years 4.2 days
5,700 hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

30%
A1SJHCPU(S8)
8,000hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr
50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

100%
5 years 5 years 5 years 4.2 days
4,000 hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

0%
5,700 hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

30%
A1SHCPU
8,000hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr
50%
43,800hr 43,800hr 43,800hr 100hr

100%
5 years 5 years 5 years 4.2 days
*1 Indicates hour rate per day (24hr) at programmable controller power ON.
(Total hour at power ON: 12hr, total hour at power OFF: 12hr become 50% each for current-
carrying hour rate)
*2 Indicates the total power failure time we guarantee , whose range is within -25 to 75 on
storage ambient temperature (0 to 55 on operating ambient temperature), based on the
memory (SRAM) characteristic value provided by the parts manufacturer.
*3 Indicates the total power failure time within 40 , 25 on storage ambient temperature,
which is calculated base on our actual measurement value.An actual value varies according
to parts characteristics. Take some sorts of reference to these values.
*4 In the case of the following, power failure compensation time after power supply is turned off
is 10min.
A battery connecter is disconnected.
A battery lead wire is disconnected.
*5 Available period of the battery (maximum lifetime) is 5 years (43,800hr).
10 - 6
Yardsticks for preventive maintenance are as follows:

[1] Replace in 4 to 5 years even when the total power failure time is less than the
guaranteed value shown in the table above.
[2] Replace when the total power failure time exceeds the guaranteed value shown
in the table above and the M9006 is ON.
POINT
(1) See to it that a battery life does not exceed the guaranteed value.
(2) When the battery life exceeds the guaranteed value, perform ROM operation
to protect a program in case that the battery dies at programmable controller
power supply OFF, or back up a program and data after M9006 is turned on
(within power failure compensation time after an alarm occurrence)
(3) The battery (A6BAT) life which is disconnected to the CPU module is 5 years.
(4) Replace the battery soon after the special relay M 9006 is ON, which means
battery low.
However, replace a battery periodically even before the alarm appearance
according to the status of use.
10 - 7
10.3.2 Battery replacement procedure
Replace the battery according to the following procedure when life of the battery is
over.Even when the battery is removed memory is backed up by the capacitor for a while.
However, if replacement takes longer than the guaranteed value shown in Table 10.5, the
content of the memory may be erased, so replace the battery quickly.
Battery replacement
Table 10.5 Period backed up by the capacitor
Back up the program, data. Period backed up by the capacitor [min]
Guaranteed value (MIN) Actual value (TYP)
5 15
Turn OFF the programmable
controller power supply.
Open the front cover of the

CPU module.
Pull the battery in use out of the

holder. Disconnect the cord from
the cord holder and disconnect
the lead connector from the
connector.
Insert the new battery into the

holder in the correct direction
and connect the lead connector
to the connector. (Place the cord CPU module
into cord holder.)
Close the front cover of the

CPU module.
A6BAT
Turn ON the programmable
controller power supply.
Battery
connector
Monitor the
M9006 with a peripheral OFF
device and confirm the
ON/OFF status.
ON
Battery is defective.
Complete
10 - 8
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11 TROUBLESHOOTING
The description, cause determination, and corrective actions of each error which may
occur during system usage are described.
11.1 Fundamentals of Troubleshooting
Besides using obviously highly-reliable devices to increase system reliability, it is an

important point to quickly start up the system again when an error occurs.
In order to quickly start up the system, find the cause of the problem and resolve it. There
are the following three basic points to be aware of when performing troubleshooting.
(1) Visual confirmation

Confirm the following points:
(a) Machine operation (stop status and operation status)
(b) Power supply ON/OFF
(c) I/O equipment status
(d) Wiring status (I/O wires and cable)
(e) Display status of each display indicator (POWER LED, RUN LED, ERROR LED,
I/O LED, etc.)
(f) Status of each setting switch (extension base, power failure compensation, etc.)
After confirming (a) to (f), connect a peripheral device and observe the operation
status of the programmable controller and program contents.
(2) Error confirmation

Observe how the error changes by performing the following operations:
(a) Set the RUN/STOP key switch to "STOP."
(b) Reset using the RUN/STOP key switch.
(c) Turn ON/OFF the power supply.
(3) Narrow down the range

By performing the (1) and (2) above, assume the faulty area in the following:
(a) Programmable controller or external?
(b) I/O module or others?
(c) Sequence program?
11 - 1
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2 Troubleshooting
The error definition determination method, error definition corresponding to the error code,
and corrective actions are described.
11.2.1 Troubleshooting procedure
The error definitions are described by events.
Error occurrence details
To "Flow for actions when the "POWER"

The "POWER" LED is OFF.
LED is turned OFF" in Section 11.2.2.
To "Flow for actions when the "RUN"

The "RUN" LED is OFF. LED is turned OFF" in Section 11.2.3.
To "Flow for actions when the "RUN"

The "RUN" LED is flickering. LED is flickering" in Section 11.2.4.
To "Flow for actions when the "ERROR"

The "ERROR" LED is ON. LED is turned ON" in Section 11.2.5.
The "ERROR" LED is To "Flow for actions when the "ERROR"

flickering. LED is flickering" in Section 11.2.6.
The I/O module will not

To "Flow for actions when the output
operate correctly.
module's output load does not turn ON" in
Section 11.2.7.
The program cannot be To "Flow for actions when the program

written. cannot be written" in Section 11.2.8.
The CPU module is To "Flow for actions when the CPU module is
not started up. not started up" in Section 11.2.9.
11 - 2
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.2 Flow for actions when the "POWER" LED is turned OFF
The corrective action when the "POWER" LED turns OFF when the power supply is turned
ON or during operation is described.
The "POWER" LED

turned OFF.
Is the power NO
being supplied? Supply the power.
YES
NO Does the YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Is the
power supply NO Set the supplied voltage
voltage within 85 to within the regulated range.
264VAC?
YES
Does the
NO YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Is the
power supply NO Fix the power supply
module securely fixed module securely.
to the base
unit?
YES
NO Does the YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Are the
overvoltage (1) Check the current
protection and
YES
capacity, and reduce the
overcurrent protection amount of overcurrent.
operating? (2) Turn OFF the input
power supply, then ON.
NO
Does the
NO YES
"POWER" LED
turn ON?
Describe the problem to

the nearest service center,
retail store, or corporate. Complete
11 - 3
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.3 Flow for actions when the "RUN" LED is turned OFF
The corrective action when the "RUN" LED turns OFF during operation is described.
The "RUN" LED

turned OFF.
Is there
an error display when YES Perform the correction using the
the peripheral device is error detail list.
connected?
NO
Reset the CPU module (1) Part error or bad connection

"RUN" LED turns
using the RUN/STOP key of programmable controller.
switch. (2) Caused by excessive noise.
"RUN" LED turns For (1)
For (2)
Set the CPU module

RUN/STOP key switch to Describe the problem to the
the "STOP" position, and nearest service center, retail
write END to the address store, or corporate office, and
0 of the peripheral device. obtain advice.
Set the RUN/STOP key

switch to the "RUN" "RUN" LED does not turn
position and operate by
setting the system to the
monitor mode with the
peripheral device.
"RUN" LED turns
Possibility of error in the

sequence program.
Connect a surge suppression

Check the program, and circuit such as a CR to the noise
correct the errors in the source.
program.
11 - 4
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.4 Flow for actions when the "RUN" LED is flickering
The corrective action when the "RUN" LED is flickering when turning on the power supply,
starting operation, or during operation is described.
The "RUN" LED

is flickering.
Confirm the error details

Hardware error
from the peripheral device.
(Refer to Section 11.3 .)
Describe the problem to the

nearest service center, retail
store, or corporate office, and
obtain advice.
Reset the CPU module

using the RUN/STOP key
switch.
Correct the error details.

(Refer to Section 11.3 .)
Set the RUN/STOP key

switch to the "RUN"
position.
Does the
NO
"RUN" LED
turn ON?
YES
Complete
11 - 5
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.5 Flow for actions when the "ERROR" LED is turned ON
The flow when the "ERROR" LED turns ON during operation is described.
The "ERROR" LED

turned ON.
NO
Is the M9008 ON?
YES
Hardware error Check the corrective

Cause of error
action
Software error
YES Can it be
Reset the CPU module using corrected?
the RUN/STOP key switch.
NO
Set the RUN/STOP key switch

to the "STOP" position. Perform corrective action.
Correct the error details.
Set the RUN/STOP key switch

to the "RUN" position.

YES Does the the nearest service center,
"ERROR" LED retail store, or corporate
turn ON? office, and obtain advice.
NO
Complete
11 - 6
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.6 Flow for actions when the "ERROR" LED is flickering
The flow when the "ERROR" LED turns ON during operation is described.
The "ERROR" LED

is flickering.
Is the details If "0"

of the special register
D9124 "0"?
Describe the problem to the

If not "0" nearest service center, retail
store, or corporate office, and
obtain advice.
Reset the annunciator coil

that is ON using the RST
F instruction.
Complete
11 - 7
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.7 Flow for actions when the output module's output load does not turn ON
The corrective action when the output load of the output module does not turn ON during
operation is described.
The output load

does not turn ON.
Is the output
NO Check the output status
module's operation
display ON? with the peripheral device
in monitor mode.
YES
Is the operation Measure the input to the

OFF
display of the input module and voltage
module ON? between COM terminals.
0V Supply
ON voltage
value
Is the Confirm that the input

voltage of the NO
load power supply
signal is OFF with the
included? peripheral device in Input
monitor mode. signal OFF
YES
What is the
voltage of between 0V Check the wiring of the Check the external
each output COM terminal load power, and recover wiring and external
of the output
module? the power. input equipment.
The supplied
voltage value
is output.
Output module error.

Replace the output Check the load wiring and
module. load, and recover.

Confirm the rush current Change the output relay the nearest service center,
NG number to set the current
when the maximum load retail store, or corporate
turn ON simultaneously. when the maximum load office, and obtain advice.
turn ON simultaneously
within specification.
OK
POINT
For problems when the input signal does not turn off and load does not turn off,
perform troubleshooting by referring to the fault examples for the I/O module in
Section 11.4.
11 - 8
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.8 Flow for actions when the program cannot be written
The flowchart when the program and other data cannot be written to the CPU module is
described.
Program cannot be written

to the programmable
controller CPU
Is the RUN/STOP RUN Set the RUN/STOP

keyswitch set keyswitch to STOP
to STOP?
STOP
Can the program YES
be written?
NO
Replace the programmable
controller CPU.
NO Can the program YES

be written?
Is the memory protect ON Switch OFF the memory

switch OFF? protect.(M.PRO OFF)
OFF
NO Can the YES
program be
written?
*
Is a ROM
YES 2
Replace the E PROM
memory cassette
used? memory cassette or use a
built-in RAM
NO NO Can the
program be YES
written?
Counstult your nearest

Mitsubishi representative.
Complete
* When using the E2PROM memory cassette, confirm that the memory protect setting pin is at
"OFF" on the A2SNMCA-30KE modules.
11 - 9
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.2.9 Flow for actions when the CPU module is not started up
The flow when the CPU module is not started up is described.
The CPU module is not started up.
See Flowchart for actions when the

Is the power supply NO
"POWER" LED is turned OFF
module LED ON? (Refer to Section 11.2.2.)
YES
Are all the power of the power NO Review the wiring and turn the all
supply modules ON? Is the power supply
module wired correctly?
power supply ON.
YES NO YES
Is CPU module up?
Try to connect the peripheral device.
Is it available
to communicate with YES
the peripheral device?
Make the PLC diagnosis, and execute

NO the troubleshooting according to the
result.
Is the extension cable
connected to the incorrect YES
direction? (Connected IN and Connect the extension cable.
IN, or OUT and OUT?)
NO NO YES
Is CPU module up?
Is the RUN/STOP key at RESET Switch the RUN/STOP key switch

switch of the CPU
to RUN.
module at RESET?
Not at RESET NO YES

Is CPU module up?
Switch the power supply module and

confirm the LED lights.
YES
Is CPU module up? Hardware error of the power supply
NO
Possible hardware errors are described below.
1) CPU module
2)Main base unit, Extension base unit Complete
3)Extension cable
4)Network module (Only when installed)
For the malfunctioning module even after executed the serial
operation check from the minimum system, please consult
your local Mitsubishi service center or representative,
explaining a detailed description of the problem.
11 - 10
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.3 Error Code List
When an error occurs while the programmable controller is running or during RUN, error is
displayed, or error code, detailed error code and error step are stored to special registers,
D9008, D9091 and D9010, respectively, by the self-diagnostics function. Error definitions
and corrective actions are shown below.
11.3.1 Procedure to read an error code
When an error occurs, the error code can be read with a peripheral device.
Refer to the Operating Manuals of the peripheral device for operation method.
11 - 11
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.3.2 AnSHCPU error code list
Table 11.1 shows the error messages, description and cause of error and corrective
actions for A1SJH(S8), A1SH and A2SH(S1). Detailed error codes are stored in D9092
only when a dedicated instruction for CC-Link is used.
Table 11.1 AnSHCPU Error Code List
Detailed
Error CPU
Error
Error Message Code module Error and Cause Corrective Action
Code
(D9008) status
(D9092)
"INSTRCT. 10 — Stop Instruction code, which cannot be (1) Read the error step by use of periph-
CODE ERR" decoded by CPU module, is included in eral equipment and correct the pro-
the program. gram at that step.
(1) Memory cassette including instruc- (2) In the case of memory cassette,
tion code, which cannot be rewrite the contents or replace the
decoded, has been loaded. cassette with a memory cassette
(2) Since the memory contents have which stores correct contents.
changed for some reason, instruc-
tion code, which cannot be
decoded, has been included.
101 Instruction code, which cannot be (1) Read the error step by use of periph-
decoded by CPU module, is included in eral equipment and correct the pro-
the program. gram at that step.
(1) Memory cassette including instruc- (2) In the case of memory cassette,
tion code, which cannot be rewrite the contents or replace the
decoded, has been loaded. cassette with a memory cassette
(2) Since the memory contents have which stores correct contents.
changed for some reason, instruc-
tion code, which cannot be
decoded, has been included.
103 Device specified by a dedicated Read the error step using a peripheral
instruction for CC-Link is not correct. device and correct the program of the
step.
104 A dedicated instruction for CC-Link has
incorrect program structure.
(Checked at 105 A dedicated instruction for CC-Link has
STOP RUN.) incorrect command name.
"PARAMETER 11 — Stop The contents of parameters of CPU (1) Load the memory cassette correctly.
ERROR" memory have changed due to noise or (2) Read the parameter contents of CPU
(Checked at the improper loading of memory. memory with a peripheral device,
power-on or check and correct the contents, and
STOP/PAUSE write them to CPU again.
RUN.)
"MISSING END 12 — Stop There is no END ( FEND ) instruction in Write END instruction at the end of
INS." the program. program.
(Checked at
STOP RUN.)
11 - 12
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11.1 AnSHCPU Error Code List (Continue)
Detailed
Error CPU
Error
Code
(D9008) status
(D9092)
"CAN’T 13 — Stop (1) There is no jump destination or mul- (1) Read the error step by use of the
EXECUTE(P)" tiple destinations specified by the peripheral device and correct the
CJ , SCJ , CALL , CALLP , or JMP program at that step.
instruction. (Insert a jump destination or reduce
(2) Although there is no CALL instruc- multiple destinations to one.)
tion, the RET instruction exists in
the program and has been exe-
cuted.
(3) The CJ , SCJ , CALL , CALLP , or
JMP instruction has been executed
with its jump destination located
below the END instruction.
(4) The number of the FOR instructions
is different from that of the NEXT
instructions.
(5) A JMP instruction is given within a
FOR to NEXT loop causing the pro-
cessing to exit the loop.
(6) Processing exited subroutine by the
JMP instruction before execution of
the RET instruction.
(Checked at (7) Processing jumped into a step in a
instruction FOR to NEXT loop or into a subrou-
execution.) tine by the JMP instruction.
"CHK FORMAT 14 — Stop (1) Instructions (including NOP ) except (1) Check the program in the CHK
ERR" LD X , LDI X , AND X and ANI instruction ladder block according to
X are included in the CHK instruc- item (1) to (7) in the left column.
tion ladder block. Correct problem using the peripheral
(2) Multiple CHK instructions are given. device and perform operation again.
(3) The number of contact points in the (2) This error code is only effective
CHK instruction ladder block when the input/output control
exceeds 150. method is a direct method.
(4) The device number of X in the CHK
instruction circuit block exceeds
X7FE.
(5) There is no CJ P ladder block
before the CHK instruction ladder
block.
(6) The device number of D1 of the
CHK D1D2 instruction is different
from that of the contact point before
the CJ P instruction.
(7) Pointer P254 is not given to the
(Checked at head of the CHK instruction circuit
STOP/PAUSE block.
RUN.) P254 CHK D1D2
"CAN’T 15 — Stop (1) Although the interrupt module is (1) Check for the presence of interrupt
EXECUTE (I)" used, there is no number of interrupt program which corresponds to the
pointer I, which corresponds to that interrupt unit, create the interrupt
module, in the program or there are program, and reduce the same num-
multiple numbers. bers of I.
(2) No IRET instruction has been (2) Check if there is IRET instruction in
entered in the interrupt program. the interrupt program and enter the
(3) There is IRET instruction in other IRET instruction.
(Checked at than the interrupt program. (3) Check if there is IRET instruction in
interrupt other than the interrupt program and
occurrence.) delete the IRET instruction.
11 - 13
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Detailed
Error CPU
Error
Code
(D9008) status
(D9092)
"ROM ERR" 17 — Stop Parameters and/or sequence programs (1) Correctly write parameters and/or
are not correctly written to the mounted sequence programs to the memory
memory cassette. cassette.
(2) Remove the memory cassettes that
contain no parameters or sequence
programs.
Parameters stored in the memory (1) Adjust the program capacity for
cassette have exceeded the limit of parameters to the memory cassette
available program capacity. used.
Ex.) Default parameters (program (2) Use the memory cassette of which
(Checked at capacity: 6k steps) are written to memory capacity is larger than the
power-on.)
A1NMCA-2KE. program capacity for parameters.
"RAM ERROR" 20 — Stop The CPU has checked if write and read Since this is CPU hardware error,
operations can be performed properly to consult Mitsubishi representative.
the data memory area of CPU, and as a
(Checked at result, either or both has not been
power-on.) performed.
"OPE. CIRCUIT 21 — Stop The operation circuit, which performs
ERR" the sequence processing in the CPU,
(Checked at does not operate properly.
power-on.)
"WDT ERROR" 22 — Stop Scan time exceeds watch dog error (1) Calculate and check the scan time of
monitor time. user program and reduce the scan
(1) Scan time of user program has been time using the CJ instruction or the
exceeded for some conditions. like.
(2) Scan time has increased due to (2) Monitor the content of special regis-
instantaneous power failure which ter D9005 by use of peripheral
occurred during scan. equipment. When the content is
other than 0, line voltage is insuffi-
(Checked at cient. When the content is other than
END 0, the power voltage is unstable.
instruction.)
"END NOT 24 — Stop (1) AnSHCPU has read other instruction Reset and run the CPU module again. If
EXECUTE" code due to noise at the END the same error persists again, it is the
instruction execution. CPU hardware error, consult Mitsubishi
(2) The END instruction has changed to representative.
(Checked at another instruction code for some
END reason.
processing.)
"WDT ERROR" 25 — Stop The CJ instruction or the like causes a Check the program for an endless loop
loop in execution of the sequence pro- and correct.
gram to disable execution of the END
instruction.
"UNIT 31 — Stop I/O module data are different from those (1) The bit in special registers D9116 to
VERIFY ERR." (Continue) at power-on. D9123 corresponding to the module
(1) The I/O module (including the spe- causing the verification error is “1.”
cial function module) is incorrectly Use a peripheral device to monitor
loaded or has been removed, or a the registers to locate the “1” bit, and
different unit has been loaded. check or replace the corresponding
module.
(2) To accept the current module
arrangement, operate the RUN/
STOP key switch to reset.
11 - 14
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Detailed
Error CPU
Error
Code
(D9008) status
(D9092)
"FUSE BREAK 32 — Continue (1) The fuse is blown in some output (1) Check the ERR LED of the output
OFF" (Stop) modules. module. Replace the module with
(2) The external power supply for the the lit LED.
output load is turned off or it is dis- (2) Checking fuse blown module can be
connected. made with the peripheral device.
Among special registers D9100 to
D9107, the bit corresponding to the
unit of fuse break "1". Monitor and
check it.
(3) Check ON/OFF of the external
power supply for the output load.
"CONTROL- 40 — Stop The FROM and TO instructions cannot The hardware of the special function
BUS ERR." be executed. module, CPU module or base unit are
(1) Error of control bus with special faulty. Consult Mitsubishi representative.
function module.
"SP. UNIT 41 — Stop There is no reply from the special The hardware of the special function
DOWN" function module during the FROM or module being accessed is faulty. Con-
TO instructions execution. sult Mitsubishi representative.
(1) The special function module being
accessed is faulty.
"I/O INT. 43 — Stop Interrupt occurs though no interrupt The hardware of a module is faulty.
ERROR" module is installed. Replace the module and check the
faulty module. Consult Mitsubishi
representative.
"SP. UNIT LAY. 44 — Stop (1) Three or more computer link mod- (1) Reduce the number of computer link
ERROR." ules are installed for a single CPU modules to within two.
module. (2) Reduce the number of MELSECNET
(2) Two or more MELSECNET (II), (II), MELSECNET /B and MELSEC-
MELSECNET /B or MELSECNET / NET /10 data link modules to one.
10 data link modules are installed. (3) Reduce the number of interrupt mod-
(3) Two or more interrupt modules are ules to one.
installed. (4) Using the peripheral device, correct
(4) A special function module is the parameter I/O assignment
installed to a slot assigned to the I/O according to the actual state of
module with parameter setup of the installation of the special function
peripheral device, or vice versa. modules.
(5) The I/O module or special function (5) Examine the I/O number and remove
module is installed outside the fol- the modules and GOT installed out-
lowing I/O number ranges, or GOT side the range specified on the left.
is connected to the bus.
A1SH, A1SJHCPU: X0 to XFF
A2SHCPU(S1): X0 to X1FF
"SP. UNIT 46 — Stop (1) Access (execution of FROM or TO (1) Use the peripheral device to read
ERROR" (Continue) instruction) has been made to a and correct the FROM and/or TO
location where no special function instruction at the error step.
module is installed.
(Checked at
462 (1) There is inconsistency in the module (1) Correct the module name of I/O
FROM/TO
name between the special instruc- assignment of the parameter to that
instructions or a
tion for CC-Link and I/O assignment of the special instruction for CC-Link.
special function of the parameter. (2) Use the peripheral device to check
module
(2) The location designated by the spe- and correct the special instruction for
dedicated
cial instruction for CC-Link is not the CC-Link at the error step.
instruction.) master module.
11 - 15
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Detailed
Error CPU
Error
Code
(D9008) status
(D9092)
"LINK PARA. 47 — Stop (1) There is inconsistency for some rea- (1) Write parameters and check again.
ERROR" (Continue) son between the data, which is writ- (2) If the error persists, there is a fault in
ten by the peripheral device in the hardware. Consult Mitsubishi repre-
parameter area of the link under sentative.
link range designation using param-
eter setup, and the link parameter
data read by the CPU module.
(2) The total number of stations is set at
"0."
"OPERATION 50 — Continue (1) The result of BCD conversion Use the peripheral device to read and
ERROR" (Stop) exceeds the rated range ("9999" or correct the error step in the program.
"99999999"). (Check the setting range of the device,
(2) There is a setting exceeding the BCD conversion value and so on.)
rated device range, disabling execu-
tion of calculation.
(3) The file register is used on the pro-
gram without designation of the
capacity of the file register.
503 The data stored by the designated Use the peripheral device to read and
device or a constant exceeds the correct the error step in the program.
allowable range.
504 The setting quantity of handled data
exceeds the allowable range.
509 The number of special instructions for Reduce the special instructions for CC-
CC-Link executed in each scan Link executed in each scan to within 64.
exceeds 64.
(Checked at
instruction A special instruction for CC-Link is Define parameters.
executed to a CC-Link module to which
execution.)
no parameter is defined.
"MAIN CPU 60 — Stop (1) The CPU malfunctioned due to (1) Take proper countermeasures for
DOWN" noise. noise.
(2) Hardware failure. (2) Consult Mitsubishi representative.
"BATTERY 70 — Continue (1) The battery voltage is low. (1) Replace the battery.
ERROR" (2) The battery lead connector is not (2) Connect the lead connector to use
(Always connected. the built-in RAM memory or power
checked.) failure compensation function.
11 - 16
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.4 Fault Examples with I/O Modules
Examples of faults concerning I/O circuits and the corrective actions are explained.
11.4.1 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions
Examples of faults concerning input circuits and the corrective actions are explained.
Table 11.2 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions
Situation Cause Countermeasure
• Leak current from input switch • Connect an appropriate resistor so that

(driven by a contactless switch, etc.) voltage between the terminals of the input
module is lower than the OFF voltage.
AC input
AC input
Example Input signal does not
1 turn OFF. Input
Leakage Input R module
current module
Power supply For CR constant,

0.1 to 0.47 F+47 to 120 (1/2W) is recommended.
• Driven by a limit switch with a neon lamp • Same as the example 1.

AC input • Or, provide a totally independent display
circuit separately.
Leakage Input
2 turn OFF. current module
Power supply
• Line capacity C of the leak current twisted pair • Same as the example 1.
cable due to line capacity of the wiring cable • However, it does not occur when power
is about 100PF/m. supply is on the side of input device as shown
below.
AC input
Example Input signal does not AC input
3 turn OFF. Leakage Input
current module Input
module
Power supply
Power supply
• Driven by a switch with LED indication • Connect an appropriate resistor so that

voltage between the terminal of the input
module and the common is lower than the
OFF voltage as shown below.
DC input (sink)
Example Input signal does not DC input (sink)
4 turn OFF.
Resister Input
Leakage current Input module
module
* An example of calculation of resistance to be

connected is provided on the following page.
11 - 17
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11.2 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective actions (Continued)
• Sneak path due to the use of two power • Use only one power supply.
supplies. • Connect a diode to prevent the sneak path
(figure below).
DC input
DC input
5 turn OFF.
E1 E2 Input
E1 E2 Input
module
module
E1 E2
<Calculation Example for Example 4>
Consider a switch with LED indicator connected to the A1SX40, giving a leakage current
of 3mA when a 24VDC power is tuTorned on.
A1SX40
Leakage current 3mA Input module
24VDC
(1) The 1.7mA OFF current of the A1SX40 is not satisfied. Hence,connect a resistor as
shown below.
A1SX40
3mA
IZ=1mA
IR=2mA R Input impedance
3.3k
24VDC
(2) Calculate the resistor value R as indicated below.

To satisfy the 1.7mA OFF current of the A1SX40, the resistor R to be connected may
be the one where 0.63mA or more will fiow.
IR :IZ=Z(Input impedance):R
IZ 1.0
R Z(Input impedance) 3.3 1.65[k ]
IR 2.0
(3) Connect a resistor of 1.5(k ) and 2 to 3(w) to a terminal which may cause an error,
since the power capacity of a resistor is resistor is seiected so that will be 3 to 5 times
greater than the actual power consumption.
(4) Also, OFF voltage when resistor R is conned will be as follows.

1
3[mA] = 3.09[V]
1 1
+
1.5[k ] 3.3[k ]
• This satisfies 6V or less OFF voltage of A1SX40.
11 - 18
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
11.4.2 Faults in the output circuit
Faults concerning output circuits and the corrective actions are explained.
Table 11.3 Faults with the output circuit and the corrective actions
• When the load is subjected to half wave

rectification inside • Connect a resistor with several tens to
(Solenoids have these types.)
several hundreds of k to the both ends of
the load.
A1SY22
Output module D1 [1]
With this kind of usage, there is no problem
with the output element, but the diode built-
An excessive voltage is
Example Load in to the load may deteriorate and burn-out.
applied to the load when
1
output is off. [2]
Resister
• When the polarity of the power supply is [1], C
is charged, and when the polarity is [2], the
voltage charged in C + voltage of the power
Load
supply are applied to the both ends of D1.
The maximum value of the voltage is about
2.2E.
• Leak current caused by built-in noise • Connect a resistor to the both ends of the
supressor load.
When the wiring distance from the output

card to the load is long, be aware of the risk
A1SY22 of a leak current due to line capacity.
Example Load does not turn OFF. Output module
Load
2 (Triac output)
Resister
Leakage current
Load
11 - 19
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Table 11.3 Faults with the output circuit and the corrective actions (Continued)
• The load current is lower than the minimum load current.

• Connect a resistor to both ends of a
Surge suppressor load so that the load current is higher
A1SY22 than the minimum load current.
Output module
Phototriac
Resistor
Control
circuit Load
The load is not Load

Example
turned OFF.
3
(Triac output)
Triac
• When the load current is lower than the minimum load

current of the output module, the triac does not operate since
the load current flows into a phototriac as shown below.
When an inductive load is connected, the load may not be
turned OFF since surge at the time of OFF is applied to the
phototriac.
• Start the relay first, then start the CR-

type timer at the contact.
A1SY22
In some timers, internal circuit may be
When load is Output module CR half wave rectification type, so the caution
timer
CR type timer, as to the example 1 is necessary here.
Example
the time limit
4 Leakage current
fluctuates.
Resister
(Triac output)
Calculate the
constant of the
CR resistance based
timer on the load.
11 - 20
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
Erroneous output due to the stray capacitance (C) between When the external power turns ON/OFF,
collector and emitter of hotocoupler. check that the external power supply
rising edge must be 10ms or more, and
There is no erroneous output at normal road. switch the SW1 to the primary side of
An erroneous output may occur at high sensitivity load external power supply.
(such as solid state relay).
Primary Secondary
Output module, Combined module side side
external power supply
Photocoupler SW1 PLC
C When switching to the secondary side of
Tr1
IC Y0 the external power supply is required, the
external power supply rising edge
connected a condenser must be slow, and
L
measured 10ms or more.
Y0
CTL+
SW
Constant
COM-
L
voltage circuit
24V
R1
If the external power supply is turned on precipitously, Ic
When the CTL+
current flows due to the stray capacitance (C) between SW
external power C1
collector and emitter of hotocoupler.
Example supply turns COM-
5 on, the load 24V
Ic current flows to the next stage of transister Tr1 gate and Y0
turns on for a R1: Several tens of ohms
moment. output turns on by 100 s
Power capacity
(external power supply current*1)2
resistance value (3 to 5)*2
C1: Several hundreds of microfarads 50V

SW: External power
supply (24V) at On *1 Refer to consumption current of the
10ms or less external power supply for modules
used in this manual.
*2 Select the power capacity of resistance

to be 3 to 5 times lager than the actual
power consumption.
Output Y0
(Example)
Approx. 100 s
R1=40 , C1=300 F
Use the below expression to calculated a

time constant
C1 R1=300 10-6 40
=12 10-3s
=12ms
11 - 21
11. TROUBLESHOOTING
The load [2] which was turned OFF may be turned ON due to To prevent the generation of the back
back electromotive force at the time of power-off [1] if an electromotive force, connect diode in
inductive load is used. parallel with load where the back
electromotive force has been generated.
Output module,
ombined module [3]
Source output
Back electromotive Source output
force
[3]
Load
ON TB1 ON
Back electromotive
[2] force
TB2 OFF
Load Load
OFF
The load which

[1]
was turned Shut off
OFF is turned COM+
Example ON for a
6 moment at CTL-
power-off.
(Transistor Sink output
Output module,
output) ombined module [3] [3]
Back electromotive
Sink output force
Load Back electromotive
ON TB1 ON force
Load
[2]
TB2 OFF
Load
OFF
[1]
Shut off
COM-
CTL+
11 - 22
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
Appendix 1 Instruction List

The instruction list to be used with a programmable controller is shown.
Refer to the following Programming Manuals for the details of the instructions.
• ACPU/QCPU-A (A Mode) Programming Manual

IB-66249
(Fundamentals)
IB-66250
• ACPU Programming Manual (Common Instructions)
• AnSHCPU/AnACPU/AnUCPU/QCPU-A (A Mode)
IB-66251
Programming Manual (Dedicated Instructions)
(1) Sequence instructions

(a) Contact instruction
Contact LD, LDI, AND, ANI, OR, ORI
(b) Association command

Association ANB, ORB, MPS, MRD, MPP
(c) Output instruction

Output OUT, SET, RST, PLS, PLF, CHK
(d) Shift instruction

Shift SFT, SFTP
(e) Master control instruction

Master control MC, MCR
(f) End instruction

Program end FEND, END
(g) Other instructions

Stop STOP
No operation NOP
Page break (Page break operation for printer

NOPLF
output)
App - 1
APPENDIX
(2) Basic instructions

(a) Comparison instructions
16 bit LD=, AND=, OR=
=
32 bit LDD=, ANDD=, ORD=
16 bit LD<>, AND<>, OR<>
32 bit LDD<>, ANDD<>, ORD<>
16 bit LD>, AND>, OR>
32 bit LDD>, ANDD>, ORD>
16 bit LD<=, AND<=, OR<=
32 bit LDD<=, ANDD<=, ORD<=
16 bit LD<, AND<, OR<
32 bit LDD<, ANDD<, ORD<
16 bit LD>=, AND>=, OR>=
32 bit LDD>=, ANDD>=, ORD>=
(b) BIN arithmetic operation instructions

16 bit Two types each for +, +P
+ Addition
32 bit Two types each for D+, D+P
16 bit Two types each for -, -P

- Subtraction
32 bit Two types each for D, D-P
16 bit *, * P
* Multiplication
32 bit D *, D *P
16 bit /, /P
/ Division
32 bit D/, D/P
16 bit INC, INCP

+1 Addition
32 bit DINC, DINCP
16 bit DEC, DECP

-1 Subtraction
32 bit DDEC, DDECP
App - 2
APPENDIX
(c) BCD arithmetic operation instructions

BCD 4-digit Two types each for B+, B+P
+ Addition Two types each for DB+,
BCD 8-digit
DB+P
BCD 4-digit Two types each for B-, B-P

- Subtraction Two types each for DB,
BCD 8-digit
DB-P
BCD 4-digit B *, B * P
* Multiplication
BCD 8-digit DB *, DB *P
BCD 4-digit B/, B/P

/ Division
BCD 8-digit DB/, DB/P
(d) BCD-BIN conversion instructions

16 bit BCD, BCDP
BIN BCD
32 bit DBCD, DBCDP
16 bit BIN, BINP

BCD BIN
32 bit DBIN, DBINP
(e) Data transfer instructions

16 bit MOV, MOVP
Transfer
32 bit DMOV, DMOVP
16 bit XCH, XCHP

Exchange
32 bit DXCH, DXCHP
16 bit CML, CMLP

Negation transfer
32 bit DCML, DCMLP
Batch transfer 16 bit BMOV, BMOVP
Same data batch transfer 16 bit FMOV, FMOVP
(f) Program branch instructions

Jump CJ, SCJ, JMP
Subroutine call CALL, CALLP, RET
Interrupt program enable/disable EI, DI, IRET
Microcomputer program call SUB
App - 3
APPENDIX
(g) Refresh instructions

Link refresh COM
Link refresh enable/disable EI, DI
Partial refresh SEG
(3) Application instructions

(a) Logical operation instructions
Two types each for WAND,
16 bit
Logical product WANDP
32 bit DAND, DANDP
16 bit Two types each for WOR, WORP

Logical sum
32 bit DOR, DORP
Two types each for WXOR,

16 bit
Exclusive logical sum WXORP
32 bit DXOR, DXORP
Two types each for WXNR,

16 bit
Not exclusive logical sum WXNRP
32 bit DXNR, DXNRP
Complements of 2
16 bit NEG, NEGP
(sign highlights)
(b) Rotation instructions

16 bit ROR, RORP, RCR, RCRP
Right rotation
32 bit DROR, DRORP, DRCR, DRCRP
16 bit ROL, ROLP, RCL, RCLP

Left rotation
32 bit DROL, DROLP, DRCL, DRCLP
(c) Shift instruction

16 bit SFR, SFRP, BSFR, BSFRP
Right shift
Device unit DSFR, DSFRP
16 bit SFL, SFLP, BSFL, BSFLP

Left shift
Device unit DSFL, DSFLP
App - 4
APPENDIX
(d) Data processing instructions

Data search 16 bit SER, SERP
16 bit SUM, SUMP

Bit check
32 bit DSUM, DSUMP
2n-bit DECO, DECOP

Decode
16 bit SEG
Encode 2n-bit ENCO, ENCOP
Bit set 16 bit BSET, BSETP
Bit reset 16 bit BRST, BRSTP
Separation 16 bit DIS, DISP
Association 16 bit UNI, UNIP
(e) FIFO instructions

Write 16 bit FIFW, FIFWP
Read 16 bit FIFR, FIFRP
(f) ASCII instructions

ASCII conversion ASC
ASCII print PR (two types), PRC
(g) Buffer memory access instructions

1 word FROM, FROMP
Data read
2 word DFRO, DFROP
1 word TO, TOP

Data write
2 word DTO, DTOP
(h) FOR to NEXT instruction

Repeat FOR, NEXT
(i) Display instructions

Display reset LEDR
(j) Data link module instructions

Data read 1 word LRDP, RFRP
Data write 1 word LWTP, RTOP
App - 5
APPENDIX
(k) Other instructions

WDT reset WDT, WDTP
Error check CHK
Status latch SLT, SLTR
Sampling trace STRA, STRAR
Carry flag set/reset 1 bit STC, CLC
Timing clock 1 bit DUTY
(4) Dedicated instructions

(a) CC-Link dedicated instructions
Network parameter setting RLPA
Automatic refresh parameter setting RRPA
Read from the auto refresh buffer memory of the

RIFR
intelligent device station
Write to the auto refresh buffer memory of the intelligent

RITO
device station
Read from the buffer memory of the intelligent device

RIRD
station
Write to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station RIWT
Write to the buffer memory of the intelligent device station

RISEND
(with handshake)
Read from the buffer memory of the intelligent device

RIRCV
station (with handshake)
App - 6
APPENDIX
Appendix 1.1 Precautions for write during RUN of a dedicated instruction
Contents of Write during RUN For LEDA For LEDB
After writing, the instruction is After writing, the instruction is

Write normal configuration during
executed with the previous executed when the previous contact is
RUN
contact ON. turned from OFF to ON.
If the previous contact remains ON

after writing, no execution causes no
LEDA/LEDB was added by Detailed error code, 104 is
processing and detailed error code
mistake. reported.
104 is reported when the previous
contact is turned from OFF to ON.
LEDA/LEDB was deleted by

LEDC/SUB/LEDR is handled as a normal instruction.
mistake.

LEDC/SUB was added by Detailed error code, 104 is
mistake. reported.

LEDC/SUB was deleted by Detailed error code, 104 is
mistake. reported.
LEDR in the back is handled as a LEDR in the back is handled as a

LEDR was added by mistake.
normal instruction. normal instruction.
If no LEDR exists immediately after

If no LEDR exists immediately the deleted LEDR, detailed error code
LEDR was deleted by mistake. after the deleted LEDR, detailed 104 is reported.
error code 104 is reported. When the LEDR exists, all instructions
found between them are not executed.
REMARK
The detailed error code 104 means that "the configuration of the program using
dedicated CC-Link instructions is not correct." (Refer to Section 11.3.2)
App - 7
APPENDICES
Appendix 2 LISTS OF SPECIAL RELAYS AND SPECIAL REGISTERS

Appendix 2.1 List of Special Relays
The special relays are the internal relays that have specific applications in the sequencer.
Therefore, do not turn the special register ON/OFF on the program. (Except for the ones
marked by *1 or *2 in the table.)
Table App2.1 Special Relay List
Number Name Description Details Applicable CPU

Usable with all
• Turned on when there is one or more output units
types of CPUs
of which fuse has been blown or external power
Only remote
*1 OFF:Normal supply has been turned off (only for small type).
Fuse blown I/O station
M9000 ON: Fuse blown unit Remains on if normal status is restored.
information
Output modules of remote I/O stations are also
is valid for
checked fore fuse condition.
A2C.
• Turned on if the status of I/O module is different Usable with all
from entered status when power is turned on. types of CPUs
Remains on if normal status is restored. Only remote
*2 I/O unit OFF:Normal
I/O module verification is done also to remote I/O I/O station
M9002 verify error ON: Error
station modules. information
(Reset is enabled only when special registers is valid for
D9116 to D9123 are reset.) A2C.
Dedicated to AnA,
• Turned on when the MINI (S3) link error is detected
MINI link master OFF:Normal A2AS, AnU and
M9004 on even one of the MINI (S3) link modules being —
module error ON: Error QCPU-A (A
loaded. Remains on if normal status is restored.
Mode).
• Turned on when an momentary power failure of 20
*1 AC DOWN OFF:AC power good ms or less occurred. Usable with all
M9005 detection ON: AC power DOWN Reset when POWER switch is moved from OFF to types of CPUs.
ON position.
• Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less
OFF:Normal Usable with all
M9006 Battery low than specified. Turned off when battery voltage
ON: Battery low types of CPUs.
becomes normal.
• Turned on when battery voltage reduces to less
*1 Battery low OFF:Normal Usable with all
than specified. Remains on if battery voltage
M9007 latch ON: Battery low types of CPUs.
becomes normal
*1 Self-diagnostic OFF:No error • Turned on when error is found as a result of self- Usable with all
M9008 error ON: Error diagnosis. types of CPUs.
• Turned on when OUT F of SET F instruction is
Annunciator OFF:No detection Usable with all
M9009 executed. Switched off when D9124 data is
detection ON: Detected types of CPUs.
zeroed.
Unusable with
• Turned on when operation error occurs during A3H, A3M, AnA,
Operation OFF:No error
M9010 execution of application instruction. Turned off A2AS, A3A board,
error flag ON: Error
when error is eliminated. AnU and QCPU-A
(A Mode).
• Turned on when operation error occurs during
*1 Operation OFF:No error Usable with all
execution of application instruction. Remains on if
M9011 error flag ON: Error types of CPUs.
normal status is restored.
OFF:Carry off Usable with all
M9012 Carry flag • Carry flag used in application instruction.
ON: Carry on types of CPUs.
APP - 8
APPENDICES
Table App2.1 Special Relay List (Continue)

• Clears the data memory including the latch range
Data memory OFF: No processing (other than special relays and special registers) in Usable with all
M9016
clear flag ON: Output clear remote run mode from computer, etc. when M9016 types of CPUs.
is on.
• Clears the unlatched data memory (other than
Data memory OFF:No processing Usable with all
M9017 special relays and special registers) in remote run
clear flag ON: Output clear types of CPUs.
mode from computer, etc. when M9017 is on.
Data link
*2 OFF:F link • Specifies the lines to be monitored for link
monitor — Dedicated to A3V.
M9018 ON: R link monitoring.
switching
User timing
M9020
clock No. 0
• Relay that repeats on/off at intervals of
User timing predetermined scan.
M9021
clock No. 1 • When power is turned on or reset is per-formed,
n2 n2
User timing scan scan the clock starts with off. Usable with all
M9022
clock No. 2 n1 • Set the intervals of on/off by DUTY instruction. types of CPUs.
User timing scan
M9023
clock No. 3 DUTY n1 n2 M9020
User timing
M9024
clock No. 4
• Writes clock data from D9025-D9028 to the clock
Unusable with An,
*2 Clock data set OFF:No processing element after the END instruction is executed
A3H, A3M, A3V,
M9025 request ON: Set requested during the scan in which M9025 has changed from
A2C and A0J2H.
off to on.
Unusable with An,
OFF:No error • Switched on by clock data (D9025 to D9028) error
M9026 Clock data error A3H, A3M, A3V,
ON: Error and switched off without an error.
A2C and A0J2H.
Usable with A3N,
Clock data OFF:No processing • Clock data such as month, day, hour, minute and A3A, A3U, A4U,
M9027
display ON: Display minute are indicated on the CPU front LED display. A73 and A3N
board.
Unusable with An,
*2 Clock data read OFF:No processing • Reads clock data to D9025-D9028 in BCD when
A3H, A3M, A3V,
M9028 request ON: Read request M9028 is on.
A2C and A0J2H.
• Turn M9029 on in the sequence program to
process all data communication requests, which
have been received in the entire scan, during END
Data
process of the scan.
*2 communication OFF:No batch process Usable with AnU
• The data communication request batch process
M9029 request batch ON: Batch process and A2US(H).
can be turned on or off during operation.
process
• OFF in default state (Each data communication
request is processed at the END process in the
order of reception.)
APP - 9
APPENDICES
0.1 second 0.05

M9030 seconds 0.05
clock
seconds
0.2 second 0.1

M9031 seconds 0.1 • 0.1 second, 0.2 second, 1 second, 2 second, and 1
clock
seconds minute clocks are generated.
• Not turned on and off per scan but turned on and
0.5 Unusable with
M9032 1 second clock off even during scan if corresponding time has
seconds 0.5 A3V.
seconds elapsed.
• Starts with off when power is turned on or reset is
1 performed.
M9033 2 second clock second 1
second
30
M9034 1 minute clock seconds 30
seconds
ON
M9036 Normally ON
OFF • Used as dummy contacts of initialization and
application instruction in sequence program.
ON • M9036 and M9037 are turned on and off without
M9037 Normally OFF regard to position of key switch on CPU front.
OFF
M9038 and M9039 are under the same condition Usable with all
as RUN status except when the key switch is at types of CPU
On only for 1 ON STOP position, and turned off and on. Switched off
M9038 1 scan
scan after run OFF if the key switch is in STOP position. M9038 is on
for one scan only and M9039 is off for one scan
RUN flag only if the key switch is not in STOP position.
ON
M9039 (off only for 1 1 scan
scan after run) OFF
PAUSE enable OFF:PAUSE disabled

M9040 • When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or
coil ON: PAUSE enabled Usable with all
remote pause contact has turned on and if M9040
PAUSE status OFF:Not during pause types of CPU
M9041 is on, PAUSE mode is set and M9041 is turned on.
contact ON: During pause
Stop status OFF:Not during stop • Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STOP Usable with all
M9042
contact ON: During stop position. types of CPU
OFF:During sampling • Turned on upon completion of sampling trace
Sampling trace trace performed the number of times preset by Unusable with A1
M9043
completion ON: Sampling trace parameter after STRA instruction is executed. and A1N.
completion Reset when STRAR instruction is executed.
• Turning on/off M9044 can execute STRA /
STRAR instruction.
(M9044 is forcibly turned on/off by a peripheral
device.)
OFF ON: STRA
When switched from OFF to ON: STRA
Same as execution Unusable with A1
M9044 Sampling trace instruction
ON OFF: STRAR and A1N.
When switched from ON to OFF: STRAR
Same as execution
instruction
The value stored in D9044 is used as the condition
for the sampling trace.
At scanning, at time Time (10 ms unit)
• Turn on M9045 to reset the WDT upon execution
Watchdog timer OFF:WDT not reset of a ZCOM instruction or data communication Unusable with A1
M9045
(WDT) reset ON: WDT reset request batch process. (Use this function for scan and A1N.
times exceeding 200 ms.)
APP - 10
APPENDICES

OFF:Except during
Unusable with A1
M9046 Sampling trace trace • Switched on during sampling trace.
and A1N.
ON: During trace
OFF:Sampling trace
Sampling trace stop • Turn on M9047 to execute sampling trace. Unusable with A1
M9047
preparation ON: Sampling trace Sampling trace is interrupted if M9047 is turned off. and A1N.
start
ON: Flashes at
• Sets whether the RUN LED flashes or not when
*2 RUN LED flicker annunciator on. Usable with
the annunciator relay F is turned on when the —
M9048 flag OFF:No flicker at A0J2H.
A0J2H is used.
annunciator on.
OFF:Low voltage is not
Memory card • Turned ON when the drop in the battery voltage for Dedicated to
detected.
M9048 battery voltage the memory card is detected. (Automatically turned — QCPU-A (A
ON: Low voltage is
detection OFF when the voltage recovers to normal.) Mode)
detected.
Switching the OFF:Up to NUL code • When M9049 is off, up to NUL (00H) code are
Unusable with An,
number of are output. output.
M9049 A3V, A2C and
output ON: 16 characters are • When M9049 is on, ASCII codes of 16 characters
A52G
characters output. are output.
Operation result
storage memory
*2 OFF:Not changed • Switched on to exchange the operation result
change contact — Dedicated to A3
M9050 ON: Changed storage memory data and the save area data.
(for CHG
instruction)
Usable with A3,
CHG • Switched on to disable the CHG instruction.
A3N, A3H, A3M,
instruction OFF:Enable • Switched on when program transfer is requested
M9051 — A3V, A3A, A3U,
execution ON: Disable and automatically switched off when transfer is
A4U, A73 and
disable complete.
A3N board
• Switched on to execute the SEG instruction as a Unusable with An,
SEG
*2 OFF:7SEG display partial refresh instruction. A3H, A3M, A3V,
instruction
M9052 ON: Partial refresh Switched off to execute the SEG instruction as a AnA, AnU, A3V
switching
7SEG display instruction. and A3A board
OFF:Sequence interrupt
EI / DI Unusable with An,
*2 control • Switched on to execute the link refresh enable,
instruction A3V and A3N
M9053 ON: Link interrupt disable (EI, DI) instructions.
switching board
control
Unusable with An,
OFF:Other than step
• Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP AnS, AnSH,
M9054 STEP RUN flag run
RUN position. A1FX, A2C,
ON: During step run
A0J2H, and A52G
Status latch OFF:Not complete • Turned on when status latch is completed. Turned Unusable with A1
M9055
complete flag ON: Complete off by reset instruction. and A1N.
OFF:Other than P, I set Usable with A3,
Main program
M9056 request A3N, A3H, A3M,
P, I set request
ON: P, I set request — A3V, A3A, A73,
• Provides P, I set request after transfer of the other
Subprogram 1 A3U, A4U and
M9057 program (for example subprogram when main
P, I set request A3N board
OFF:Except during P, I program is being run) is complete during run.
Subprogram 2 set request Automatically switched off when P, I setting is
M9060 complete.
P, I set request ON: During P, I set
request — Dedicated to A4U
Subprogram 3
M9061
P, I set request
APP - 11
APPENDICES

• Turned on when one of remote terminal modules
has become a faulty station.
(Communication error is detected when normal
communication is not restored after the number of
retries set at D9174.)
Remote OFF:Normal • Turned off when communication with all re-mote Usable with A2C
M9060 —
terminal error ON: Error terminal modules is restored to normal with and A52G
automatic online return enabled.
• Remains on when automatic online return is
disabled.
• Not turned on or off when communication is
suspended at error detection.
• Turned on when communication with a remote
terminal module or an I/O module is faulty.
• Communication error occurs due to the following
reasons.
• Initial data error
• Cable breakage
Communication OFF:Normal Usable with A2C
M9061 • Power off for remote terminal modules or I/O —
error ON: Error and A52G
modules
• Turned off when communication is restored to
normal with automatic online return enabled
• Remains on when communication is suspended at
error detection with automatic online return
disabled.
OFF:Other than divided • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57
Divided transfer Usable with AnA,
M9065 processing (S1)/AD58 is done by divided processing, and —
status and AnU.
ON: Divided processing turned off at completion of divided processing.
Transfer
*2 OFF:Batch transfer • Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 Usable with AnA,
processing —
M9066 ON: Divided transfer (S1)/AD58 is done by divided processing. and AnU.
switching
• Turned on when one of I/O modules has become a
faulty station.
( Communication error is detected when normal
communication is not restored after the number of
retries set at D9174.)
I/O module error OFF:Normal • Turned off when communication with all I/O Usable with A2C
M9067 —
detection ON: Error modules is restored to normal with automatic and A52G.
online return enabled.
• Remains on when automatic online return is
disabled.
• Not turned on or off when communication is
suspended at error detection.
OFF:Automatic online
return enabled
Automatic online • Turned on when line check with I/O modules and
return disabled remote terminal modules is performed. Usable with A2C
M9068 Test mode —
Communication • Turned off when communication with I/O modules and A52G.
suspended at and remote terminal modules is per-formed.
online error
ON: Line check
• Sets whether all outputs are turned off or retained
OFF:All outputs are at communication error.
Output at line turned off. OFF: All outputs are turned off at communication Usable with A2C
M9069 —
error ON: Outputs are error. and A52G.
retained. ON: Outputs before communication error are
retained.
APP - 12
APPENDICES

OFF:Reading time • Turn on to reduce the search time of A8UPU/
Time required
*2 reduction OFF A8PUJ. Usable with AnU
for search of
M9070 ON: Reading time (In this case, the scan time of the CPU module and A2US(H).
A8UPU/A8PUJ
reduction ON extends by 10%.)
*1 OFF:No WDT error • Turns on when WDT error is detected by the self-
WDT error flag — Dedicated to A73.
M9073 ON: WDT error check of the PCPU.
• The clock data registered in D9073 to D9076 is
OFF:No processing Dedicated to
Clock data set written to the clock device after the execution of the
M9073 ON: Set request is — A2CCPUC24
request END instruction of the scan in which the state of
made (-PRF)
M9073 changes from OFF to ON.
OFF:Disables writing to
Setting of Dedicated to
ROM • Turned on to enable writing to the flash ROM.
M9073 writing to flash — QCPU-A (A
ON: Enables writing to (DIP switch 3 should be set to ON.)
ROM Mode)
ROM
OFF:PCPU ready
• Set if the motor is not running when it is checked at
PCPU ready incomplete
M9074 PC ready (M2000) on. Turned off when M2000 is — Dedicated to A73.
complete flag ON: PCPU ready
turned off.
complete
• This goes ON when a clock data (D9073 to D9076) Dedicated to
OFF:No error
M9074 Clock data error error occurs. This remains OFF when there is no — A2CCPUC24
ON: Error occurred
error. (-PRF)
Request for Dedicated to
OFF ON: Starts • When turned from OFF to ON, writing to the built-in
M9074 writing to flash — QCPU-A (A
writing to ROM ROM is started.
ROM Mode)
OFF:Other than test • Turned ON when a test mode request is made
M9075 Test mode flag mode from a peripheral device. Reset when test mode is — Dedicated to A73.
ON: Test mode finished.
OFF:Failed writing to
Successful
ROM • Turned on when writing to the built-in ROM is Dedicated to
completion of
M9075 ON: Successfully successfully completed. — QCPU-A (A
writing to built-in
completed writing (This status is stored in D9075.) Mode)
ROM
to ROM
OFF:External
emergency stop • Turned off when the external emergency stop input
External
input is on. connected to the EMG terminal of A70SF is turned
M9076 emergency stop — Dedicated to A73.
ON: External on. Turned on when the external emergency stop
input flag
emergency stop input is turned off.
input is off.
OFF:No processing Dedicated to
Clock data read • When M9076 is ON, clock data is read out to
M9076 ON: Read request is — A2CCPUC24
request D9073 to D9076 in BCD values.
made (-PRF)
OFF:Writing to ROM
Dedicated to
Status of writing disabled • Turns ON when writing to built-in ROM is enabled.
M9076 — QCPU-A (A
to built-in ROM ON: Writing to ROM (Turns ON when DIP switch and M9073 are ON.)
Mode)
enabled
• Turned on when there is an error in the contents of
Manual pulse
OFF:All axes normal manual pulse generator axis setting. Turned off if
M9077 generator axis — Dedicated to A73.
ON: Error axis detected all axes are normal when the manual pulse
setting error flag
generator enable flag is turned on.
APP - 13
APPENDICES

• Compares the setting value at D9077 with the time
elapsed from the start of measurement
(accumulation time) at every scan. Then, performs
the following operations:
Setting value > Accumulation time:
Turns M9077 ON and clears the accumulation
Sequence time.
Dedicated to
accumulation OFF:Time not elapsed Setting value < Accumulation time:
M9077 — QCPU-A
time ON: Time elapsed Turns M9077 from ON to OFF and clears the
(A Mode)
measurement accumulation time. When M9077 is already OFF,
clears the accumulation time.
* When 1 to 255 is designated at D9077, M9077 is
turned ON at the first scan.
* When the value other than 1 to 255 is designated
at D9077, the value in D9077 is reset to 0 and
M9077 is always turned OFF.
• Turned on when test mode is not available though
Test mode
OFF:No error a test mode request was made from a peripheral
M9078 request error — Dedicated to A73.
ON: Error device. Turned off if test mode becomes available
flag
by making another test mode request.
• Turned on when the positioning data of the servo
program designated by the DSFRP instruction has
Servo program OFF:No data error
M9079 an error. — Dedicated to A73.
setting error flag ON: Data error
Turned off when the data has no error after the
DSFRP instruction is executed again.
Turned ON/OFF according to the number of
remaining instructions ( RIRD / RIWT / RISEND /
RIRCV ) being executable simultaneously at one
scan.
OFF: Number of remaining instructions
executable simultaneously: 1 to 10
ON: Number of remaining instructions
executable simultaneously: 0
OFF: Number of By assigning M9080 as execution condition, the
remaining number of instructions above executed
instructions simultaneously at one scan can be limited to 10 or
BUSY flag for executable less.
Can be used only
execution of simultaneously: *4: This function is available with the CPU of the fol-
with AnU, A2US,
M9080 CC-Link 1 to 10 lowing S/W versions or later.
or AnSH, QCPU-
dedicated ON: Number of CPU Type Name Software Version A (A Mode) *4
instruction remaining
Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A,
instructions Q06HCPU-A
executable Available with all versions
simultaneously: 0 A1SJHCPU, A1SHCPU,
A2SHCPU
A2UCPU(S1), A3UCPU, S/W version Q
A4UCPU (Manufactured in July, 1999)
S/W version E
A2USCPU(S1)
(Manufactured in July, 1999)
S/W version L
A2USHCPU-S1
APP - 14
APPENDICES

OFF:Communication
request to remote
Registration Usable with AnA,
terminal modules
area busy signal • Indication of communication enable/disable to AnA, AnU, A2AS,
enabled
M9081 for remote terminal modules connected to the MINI — QCPU-A
ON: Communication
communication (S3) link module, A2C or A52G. (A Mode)
request to remote
request A2C and A52G.
terminal modules
disabled
• Turned on when the final station number of the
OFF:Final station
remote terminal modules and remote I/O modules
Final station number agreement
connected to the A2C or A52G disagrees with the Dedicated to A2C
M9082 number ON: Final station —
total number of stations set in the initial setting. and A52G.
disagreement number
• Turned off when the final station number agrees
disagreement
with the total number of stations at STOP RUN
• Specify whether the following errors are to be
checked or not after the END instruction is
executed (to set END instruction processing
*2 OFF:Checks enabled Unusable with An,
Error check time):
M9084 ON: Checks disabled A2C and A3V.
• Fuse blown
• I/O unit verify error
• Battery error
BASIC program OFF:A3M-BASIC stop • Turned on when the A3M-BASIC is in RUN state,
M9086 — Dedicated to A3M
RUN flag ON: A3M-BASIC run and turned off when it is in STOP state.
OFF:A3M-BASIC RUN • Specifies enable/disable of A3M-BASIC execution
BASIC program enable when the A3MCPU is in PAUSE state. Dedicated to
M9087 —
PAUSE flag ON: A3M-BASIC OFF: A3M-BASIC is executed. A3M.
disable ON: A3M-BASIC is not executed.
• Turns on if the power to the PC side is shut off
Power supply
OFF:Normal when the external power supply is connected to Dedicated to
M9090 problem status —
ON: Power off the CPU board. A2USH board
on the PC side
It stays on even after the status becomes normal.
Usable with AnA,
• Turned on when an operation error detail factor is
*1 Operation error OFF:No error A2AS, AnU and
stored at D9091, and remains ON after normal —
M9091 detail flag ON: Error QCPU-A
state is restored.
(A Mode).
Unusable with
Microcomputer • Turned on when an error occurred at execution of
*1 OFF:No error AnA, A2AS, AnU
subroutine call the microcomputer program package, and remains —
M9091 ON: Error and QCPU-A
error flag ON after normal state is restored.
(A Mode).
External power • Turns on when the external power being supplied
OFF:Normal Dedicated to
M9092 supply problem to the CPU board is shut off. —
ON: Power off A2USH board
status It stays on even after the status becomes normal.
Duplex power
OFF:Normal • Turned on when overheat of a duplex power supply
M9092 supply overheat — Dedicated to A3V.
ON: Overheat module is detected.
error
OFF:Normal
Duplex power ON: Failure or AC • Turned on when a duplex power supply module
M9093 — Dedicated to A3V.
supply error power supply caused failure or the AC power supply is cut down.
down
APP - 15
APPENDICES

• After the head address of the required I/O module
is set to D9094, switching M9094 on allows the I/O
module to be changed in online mode. (One
module is only allowed to be changed by one
setting.)
*2 *3 OFF:Changed • To be switched on in the program or peripheral Usable with An,
I/O change flag —
M9094 ON: Not changed device test mode to change the module during AnN, AnA, AnU.
CPU RUN. To be switched on in peripheral device
test mode to change the module during CPU
STOP.
• RUN/STOP mode must not be changed until I/O
module change is complete.
• During duplex operation of the operating CPU with
Duplex OFF:Normal
a stand-by CPU, verification is performed by the
M9095 operation verify ON: Duplex operation — Dedicated to A3V.
both to each other. Turned on when a verify error
error verify error
occurred.
A3VCPU A OFF:No error • Turn on when a self-check error occurred on the
selfcheck error ON: Error A3VCPU A mounted next to the A3VTU.
A3VCPU B OFF:No error • Turn on when a self-check error occurred on the
selfcheck error ON: Error A3VCPU B mounted next to the A3VCPU A.
A3VCPU C OFF:No error • Turn on when a self-check error occurred on the
selfcheck error ON: Error A3VCPU C mounted next to the A3VCPU B.
A3VTU OFF:No error • Turned on when a self-check error occurred on the
selfcheck error ON: Error A3VTU.
Usable with AnN*,
AnA*, AnU,
OFF:No SFC program A2AS, QCPU-A
SFC program • Turned on if the SFC program is registered, and
M9100 ON: SFC program — (A Mode), A2C,
registration turned off if it is not.
registered A0J2H, AnS,
AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Usable with AnN*,
AnA*, AnU,
• Should be turned on by the program if the SFC
A2AS, QCPU-A
*2 SFC program OFF:SFC program stop program is to be started. If turned off, operation
— (A Mode), A2C,
M9101 start/stop ON: SFC program start output of the execution step is turned off and the
A0J2H, AnS,
SFC program is stopped.
AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
• Selects the starting step when the SFC program is
restarted using M9101.
ON: Started with the step of the block being
executed when the program stopped.
Usable with AnN*,
OFF: All execution conditions when the SFC
AnA*, AnU,
program stopped are cleared, and the
A2AS, QCPU-A
*2 SFC program OFF:Initial start program is started with the initial step of
— (A Mode), A2C,
M9102 starting status ON: Continuous start block 0.
A0J2H, AnS,
• Once turned on, the program is latched in the
AnSH, A1FX and
system and remains on even if the power is turned
A52G.
off.
Should be turned off by the sequence program
when turning on the power, or when starting with
the initial step of block 0.
*: Usable with AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC.
For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC, refer to the MELSAP-II Programming Manual.
APP - 16
APPENDICES

Usable with AnN*,
• Selects consecutive or step-by-step transfer of
AnA*, AnU,
OFF:Consecutive step steps of which transfer conditions are established
Consecutive A2AS, QCPU-A
*2 transfer disable when all of the transfer conditions of consecutive
step transfer — (A Mode), A2C,
M9103 ON: Consecutive step steps are established.
enable/disable A0J2H, AnS,
transfer enable ON: Consecutive transfer is executed.
AnSH, A1FX and
OFF: One step per one scan is transferred.
A52G.
Usable with AnN*,
• Turned on when consecutive transfer is not AnA*, AnU,
Consecutive OFF:Transfer complete executed with consecutive transfer enabled. A2AS, QCPU-A
M9104 transfer ON: Transfer Turned off when transfer of one step is completed. — (A Mode), A2C,
prevention flag incomplete Consecutive transfer of a step can be prevented by A0J2H, AnS,
writing an AND condition to corresponding M9104. AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Step transfer
monitoring timer
*2
start
M9108
(corresponds to
D9108)
Step transfer
monitoring timer
*2
start
M9109
(corresponds to
D9109)
Step transfer
monitoring timer
*2
start
M9110
(corresponds to
D9110) Usable with AnN*,
Step transfer AnA*, AnU,
OFF:Monitoring timer
monitoring timer • Turned on when the step transfer monitoring timer A2AS, QCPU-A
*2 reset
start is started. Turned off when the monitoring timer is — (A Mode), A2C,
M9111 ON: Monitoring timer
(corresponds to reset. A0J2H, AnS,
reset start
D9111) AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Step transfer
monitoring timer
*2
start
M9112
(corresponds to
D9112)
Step transfer
monitoring timer
*2
start
M9113
(corresponds to
D9113)
Step transfer
monitoring timer
*2
start
M9114
(corresponds to
D9114)
APP - 17
APPENDICES

Usable with AnN*,
AnA*, AnU,
Active step • Turned on when sampling trace of all specified A2AS, QCPU-A
OFF:Trace start
M9180 sampling trace blocks is completed. Turned off when sampling — (A Mode), A2C,
ON: Trace complete
complete flag trace is started. A0J2H, AnS,
AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Usable with AnN*,
AnA*, AnU,
Active step OFF:Trace not executed. • Turned on when sampling trace is being executed. A2AS, QCPU-A
M9181 sampling trace ON: Trace being Turned off when sampling trace is completed or — (A Mode), A2C,
execution flag executed. suspended. A0J2H, AnS,
AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
Usable with AnN*,
• Selects sampling trace execution enable/disable. AnA*, AnU,
Active step OFF:Trace disable/ ON: Sampling trace execution is enabled. A2AS, QCPU-A
*2
sampling trace suspend OFF: Sampling trace execution is disabled. — (A Mode), A2C,
M9182
enable ON: Trace enable If turned off during sampling trace A0J2H, AnS,
execution, trace is suspended. AnSH, A1FX and
A52G.
• Selects the operation output when block stop is
Usable with AnN*,
executed.
AnA*, AnU,
ON: Retains the ON/OFF status of the coil being
Operation A2AS, QCPU-A
*2 OFF:Coil output off used by using operation output of the step
output at block — (A Mode), A2C,
M9196 ON: Coil output on being executed at block stop.
stop A0J2H, AnS,
OFF: All coil outputs are turned off. (Operation
AnSH, A1FX and
output by the SET instruction is retained
A52G.
regardless of the ON/OFF status of M9196.)
I/O numbers
M9197
M9198
to be
displayed
M9197 • Switches I/O numbers in the fuse blow module
Fuse blow, I/O OFF OFF X/Y0 to 7F0
storage registers (D9100 to D9107) and I/O Usable with AnU,
verify error X/Y800 to
ON OFF module verify error storage registers (D9116 to — A2AS and QCPU-
display FF0 D9123) according to the combination of ON/OFF A (A Mode)
switching
X/Y1000 to of the M9197 and M9198.
OFF ON
17F0
M9198
X/Y1800 to
ON ON
1FF0
• When sampling trace / status latch is executed,
Data recovery the setting data stored in the CPU module is
Usable with AnU,
of online OFF:Data recovery OFF recovered to enable restart.
M9199 — A2AS and QCPU-
sampling trace / ON: Data recovery ON • Turn on M9199 to execute again.
A (A Mode)
status latch (There is no need to write data with the peripheral
device.)
APP - 18
APPENDICES
POINTS
(1) Contents of the M special relays are all cleared by power off, latch clear or
reset with the reset key switch. When the RUN/STOP key switch is set in the
STOP position, the contents are retained.
(2) The above relays with numbers marked *1 remain "on" if normal status is
restored. Therefore, to turn them "off", use the following method:
(a) Method by use program

Reset execution
Insert the circuit shown at right into command
the user program and turn on the RST M9000
reset execution command contact to

Special function relay to be reset
clear the special relay M.
(b) Use the test function of the peripheral device to reset forcibly.
For the operation procedure, refer to the manuals for peripheral devices.
(c) By moving the RESET key switch on the CPU front to the RESET
position, the special relays are turned off.
(3) Special relays marked *2 above are switched on/off in the sequence
program.
(4) Special relays marked *3 above are switched on/off in test mode of the
peripheral equipment.
(5) Turn OFF the following special relays after resetting the related special
resisters. Unless the related special registers are reset, the special relays will
be turned ON again even if they are turned reset. (Except for the AnU,
A2US(H), and QCPU-A (A mode).)
Special Relay Related Special Resister

M9000 D9100 to D9107
M9001 D9116 to D9123
APP - 19
APPENDICES
Appendix 2.2 Special Registers
Special registers are data registers of which applications have been determined inside the
PC. Therefore, do not write data to the special registers in the program (except the ones
with numbers marked 2 in the table).
Table App2.2 Special Register List

• When fuse blown modules are detected, the lowest
number of detected units is stored in hexadecimal.
Unusable with
(Example: When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules
A0J2H.
have blown, "50" is stored in hexadecimal) To monitor
Only remote
Fuse blow module the number by peripheral devices, perform monitor
D9000 Fuse blow I/O station
number operation given in hexadecimal.
information
(Cleared when all contents of D9100 to D9107 are
is valid for
reset to 0.)
A2C.
• Fuse blow check is executed also to the output
modules of remote I/O stations.
• Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting
switch numbers or base slot numbers when fuse blow
occurred.
I/O Module for A0J2 Extension Base Unit
Setting Base Unit
Stored Data Stored Data
Switch Slot No.
0 1 0 5
1 2 1 6
Fuse blow module Dedicated to
D9001 Fuse blow 2 3 2 7 —
number A0J2H.
3 4 3 8
4 5
5 6
6 7
7 8
• In case of remote I/O station, (module I/O number/10H)
+ 1 is stored.
• If an I/O module whose data is different from the
entered data when the power is turned on is detected,
the head I/O number of the detected module is stored
in hexadecimal. When the situation is detected in Unusable with
multiple modules, the lowest number among the A0J2H.
module will be stored. (Storing method is the same as Only remote
that of D9000.) To monitor the number by peripheral I/O station
devices, perform monitor operation given in information
hexadecimal. is valid for
I/O module I/O module verify (Cleared when all contents of D9116 to D9123 are A2C.
D9002 reset to 0.)
verify error error unit number
• I/O module verify check is executed also to the
modules of remote I/O terminals.
• If an I/O module, of which data is different from data
entered, is detected when the power in turned on, the
I/O number corresponding to the setting switch No. or
Dedicated to
base unit No. is stored.(Storing method is the same as —
A0J2H.
that of D9001).
• In case of remote I/O station, (module I/O number/10H)
+ 1 is stored.
APP - 20
APPENDICES
Table App2.2 Special Register List (Continue)

The number of bits • The number of bits detected by execution of the SUM
SUM instruction Dedicated to
D9003 detected by SUM instruction are stored. in BIN code and updated every —
detection bits A0J2H.
instruction detection. execution thereafter.
• Error status of the MINI (S3) link detected on loaded
MINI (S3) link module is stored.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Data communication Bits which correspond

between the to the signals of MINI
programmable Usable with
(S3) link module,
*1 MINI link master AnA, A2AS,
Error detection status controller CPU and shown below, are —
D9004 module error MINI (S3) link module AnA board and
turned on as the signals
is disabled. AnU.
are turned on.
Hardware error
(X0/X20)
MINI(S3) link error
detection (X6/X26)
MINI(S3) link
communication error
(X7/X27)
• 1 is added each time input voltage becomes 85% or

*1 AC DOWN Usable with all
AC DOWN count less of rating while the CPU unit is performing
D9005 counter types of CPUs.
operation, and the value is stored in BIN code.
• Bits which correspond to CPU of which battery is low
are turned on in D9006, as shown below.
Indicates the CPU B15 B3 B2 B1 B0

0 0 Dedicated to
D9006 Battery low module of which —
A3V.
battery voltage is low.
CPU A
0: Normal CPU B
1: Battery low CPU C
*1 Shelf-diagnostic Self-diagnostic error • When error is found as a result of self-diagnosis, error Usable with all
D9008 error number number is stored in BIN code. types of CPUs.
• When one of F0 to 255 is turned on by OUT F or
SET F , the F number, which has been detected
earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is Unusable with
stored in BIN code. A3, A3N, A3A,
• D9009 can be cleared by RST F or LEDR A73 and A3N
instruction. If another F number has been detected, the board.
clearing of D9009 causes the next number to be stored
F number at which in D9009.
Annunciator
D9009 external failure has • When one of F0 to 255 is turned on by OUT F or
detection
occurred SET F , the F number, which has been detected
earliest among the F numbers which have turned on, is
stored in BIN code. Usable with A3,
• D9009 can be cleared by executing RST F or LEDR — A3N, A3A, A73
instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on and A3N board.
CPU front to ON position. If another F number has
been detected, the clearing of D9009 causes the nest
number to be stored in D9009.
APP - 21
APPENDICES

• When operation error has occurred during execution of
Step number at which application instruction, the step number, at which the
Unusable with
D9010 Error step operation error has error has occurred, is stored in BIN code. Thereafter,
A3H and A3M.
occurred each time operation error occurs, the contents of
D9010 are renewed.
• When operation error has occurred during execution of
application instruction, the step number, at which the
Step number at which
*1 error has occurred, is stored in BIN code. Since Usable with all
Error step operation error has
D9011 storage into D9011 is made when M9011 changes from types of CPUs.
occurred
off to on, the contents of D9010 cannot be renewed
unless M9011 is cleared by user program.
• The I/O control mode set is returned in any of the
following numbers: Unusable with
I/O control I/O control mode
D9014 0. Both input and output in direct mode An, A3H and
mode number
1. Input in refresh mode, output in direct mode A3M.
3. Both input and output in refresh mode
• The operation states of CPU as shown below are
stored in D9015.
B15.....B12 B11......B8 B7....... B4 B3 ....... B0
CPU key switch: Remains the same in

remote RUN/STOP mode.
0 RUN
1 STOP
2 PAUSE
3 STEP RUN
CPU operating Operating states of Usable with all
D9015
states CPU Remote RUN/STOP by parameter setting types of CPUs.
0 RUN
1 STOP
2 PAUSE
Status in program
0 Except below
1 STOP instruction execution
Remote RUN/STOP by computer

0 RUN
1 STOP
2 PAUSE
* When the CPU is in RUN mode and M9040 is off, the
CPU remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE
mode.
APP - 22
APPENDICES

0: ROM
ROM/RAM • Indicates the setting of memory select chip. One value Usable with A1
1: RAM —
setting of 0 to 2 is stored in BIN code. and A1N.
2: E2PROM
0: Main program
(ROM) • Indicates which sequence program is run presently.
1: Main program One value of 0 to 2 is stored in BIN code. Unusable with
(RAM) ("2" is not stored when AnS, AnSH, A1FX, A0J2H, A1 and A1N
2: Subprogram A2C, A2, A2N, A2A, A2AS and A2U is used.)
(RAM)
0: Main program
(ROM)
1: Main program
(RAM)
2: Subprogram 1
(RAM)
3: Subprogram 2
D9016
(RAM)
Program 4: Subprogram 3
number (RAM)
5: Subprogram 1
(ROM) • Indicates which sequence program is run presently. Dedicated to
—
6: Subprogram 2 One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code. AnU.
(ROM)
7: Subprogram 3
(ROM)
8: Main program
(E2PROM)
9: Subprogram 1
(E2PROM)
A: Subprogram 2
(E2PROM)
B: Subprogram 3
(E2PROM)
• If scan time is smaller than the content of D9017, the
Minimum scan time value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the Usable with all
D9017 Scan time
(per 10 ms) minimum value of scan time is stored into D9017 in types of CPUs.
BIN code.
• Scan time is stored in BIN code at each END and Usable with all
D9018 Scan time Scan time (per 10 ms)
always rewritten. types of CPUs.
• If scan time is larger than the content of D9019, the
Maximum scan time value is newly stored at each END. Namely, the Usable with all
D9019 Scan time
(per 10 ms) maximum value of scan time is stored into D9019 in types of CPUs.
BIN code.
• Sets the interval between consecutive user program
Constant scan time starts in multiples of 10 ms.
*2 Unusable with
Constant scan (Set by user in 10 ms 0: No setting
D9020 An.
increments) 1 to 200: Set. Program is executed at intervals of (set
value) × 10 ms.
• Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after
D9021 Scan time Scan time (1 ms unit) —
every END. Usable with
• When the PC CPU starts running, it starts counting 1 AnA, A2AS,
every second. AnU, AnA board
1 second Counts 1 every and QCPU-A
D9022 • It starts counting up from 0 to 32767, then down to - —
counter second. (A Mode).
32768 and then again up to 0. Counting repeats this
routine.
APP - 23
APPENDICES

• Stores the year (2 lower digits) and month in BCD.
B15. . . . . B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
*2 Clock data
Clock data 1987,July
D9025 (Year, month)
H8707
Year Month
• Stores the day and hour in BCD.

Unusable with
B15. . . . . B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7. . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
*2 Clock data An, A3H, A3M,
Clock data 31th,10
D9026 (Day, hour) A3V, A2C and
o'clock
A0J2H.
Day Hour H3110
• Stores the minute and second in BCD.

B15. . . . . B12 B11 . . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
*2 Clock data
Clock data 35 minutes,
D9027 (Minute, second)
48 seconds
Minute Second H3548
• Stores the day of the week in BCD.

B15 . . . . B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
Friday
H0005
Unusable with
Day of the week
*2 Clock data An, A3H, A3M,
Clock data 0 must be set. 0 Sunday
D9028 (Day of the week) 1 Monday A3V, A2C and
2 Tuesday A0J2H.
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
APP - 24
APPENDICES

D9021
D9022 • Sets the head station number of remote terminal
modules connected to A2C and A52G. Setting is not
D9023
necessarily in the order of station numbers.
D9024 A2CCPUC24:1 to 57
D9025 Other CPUs:1 to 61
• Data configuration
D9026
Remote D9021 Remote terminal module No.1 area
D9027 terminal D9022
1 to 61 Remote terminal module No.2 area
D9028 parameter
............
setting
D9029
D9030
D9031
D9032 D9033 Remote terminal module No.13 area
D9033 D9034 Remote terminal module No.14 area
Usable with
—
D9034 A2C and A52G.
• Sets attribute of each remote terminal module
connected to A2C and A52G with 0 or 1 at each bit.
0: Conforms to the MINI standard protocol or
remote terminal unit.
1: No-protocol mode of AJ35PTF-R2
• Data configuration
b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Attribute of 0: MINI standard
D9035 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
D9035 remote terminal protocol
module 1: No protocol
Remote terminal No.1

........

Usable with
AnA, A2AS,
Extension file • Stores the block No. of the extension file register being
D9035 Use block No. — AnU and
register used in BCD code.
QCPU-A
(A Mode).
• Sets the total number of stations (1 to 64) of I/O
Total number of Usable with
D9036 1 to 64 modules and remote terminal modules which are —
stations A2C and A52G.
connected to an A2C or A52G.
APP - 25
APPENDICES

• Designate the device number for the extension file
register for direct read and write in 2 words at D9036
and D9037 in BIN data.
D9036 Use consecutive numbers beginning with R0 of block
No. 1 to designate device numbers.
The devise number Usable with
For designation
used for getting direct Extension file register AnA, A2AS,
extension file
access to each device 0 Block No.1 — AnU and
register device to
for extension file area QCPU-A
numbers 16383
register 16384 Block No.2 (A Mode).
D9037 D9037,D9036 to area
Device No.(BIN data)
to
• Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate (or

flicker) to indicate errors with error code numbers. Usable with
D9038 Priority 1 to 4 • Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown A2C, AnS,
below. AnSH, A1FX,
LED indication A0J2H, A52G
b15 . . . . . . . b12 b11. . . . . . . . . b8 b7 . . . . . . . . . . b4 b3 . . . . . . . . . . . b0 —
priority D9038 Priority 4 Priority 3 Priority 2 Priority 1 AnA, A2AS,
AnU and
D9039 Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5
D9039 Priority 5 to 7 QCPU-A
• For details, refer to the applicable CPUs User’s Manual (A Mode).
and the ACPU (Fundamentals) Programming Manual.
• The value stored in D9044 is used as the condition of
the sampling trace when M9044 is turned on or off with
the peripheral device to start sampling trace STRA or
Step or time during Usable with A1
D9044 Sampling trace STRAR .
sampling trace and A1N
At scanning ... 0
At time........... Time (10 ms unit)
Stores the value in BIN code for D9044.
• Stores the block number of the expansion file register
Expansion file register
which is used as the work area for the execution of a
SFC program block number to be
SFC program in a binary value.
D9049 execution work used as the work area
• Stores "0" if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller,
area for the execution of a
which cannot be expansion file register No. 1, is used
SFC program.
or if M9100 is OFF.
Usable with
• Stores code numbers of errors occurred in the SFC
— AnN*, AnA*,
program in BIN code.
AnU, A2AS,
0: No error
QCPU-A
Code number of error 80: SFC program parameter error
SFC program (A Mode), A2C,
D9050 occurred in the SFC 81: SFC code error
error code A0J2H, AnS,
program 82: Number of steps of simultaneous execution
AnSH, A1FX
exceeded
and A52G.
83: Block start error
84: SFC program operation error
• Stores the block number in which an error occurred in
Block number in
the SFC program in BIN code.
D9051 Error block which an error —
In the case of error 83 the starting block number is
occurred.
stored.
For the AnN and AnA which are compatible with SFC, refer to the MELSAP-ll Programming Manual.
APP - 26
APPENDICES

• Stores the step number in which error 84 occurred in
the SFC program in BIN code.
Step number in which
D9052 Error step Stores "0" when errors 80, 81 and 82 occurred. — Usable with
an error occurred. AnN*, AnA*,
Stored the block starting step number when error 83
occurred. AnU, A2S,
QCPU-A
Transfer condition • Stores the transfer condition number in which error 84
(A Mode), A2C,
D9053 Error transfer number in which an occurred in the SFC program in BIN code. —
A0J2H, AnS,
error occurred. Stored "0" when errors 80, 81, 82 and 83 occurred.
AnSH, A1FX
Sequence step • Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and A52G.
Error sequence
D9054 number in which an and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the —
step
error occurred. SFC program in BIN code.
• Stores the step number when status latch is executed.
• Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch
is executed in a main sequence program. Usable with
Status latch • Stores the block number and the step number if status AnA, A2AS,
Status latch execution
D9055 execution step latch is executed in a SFC program. — AnA board, AnU
step number
number and QCPU-A
Block No. Step No.
(A Mode).
(BIN) (BIN)
Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits
Stores the software version of the CPU module's internal

system in ASCII codes.
Example: Stores "41H" for version A.
Note)The software version of the internal system may be
different from the version marked on the housing.
*5: This function is available with the CPU of the
following S/W versions or later.
CPU Type Name Software Version
A2ACPU (P21/R21), S/W version W
A2ACPU-S1 (P21/R21) (Manufactured in July, 1998) Can be used
Software Software version of only with AnU,
D9060 S/W version X
version internal system A3ACPU (P21/R21) A2US, or AnSH.
*5
A2UCPU (S1), S/W version H
A3UCPU, A4UCPU (Manufactured in July, 1998)
A1SJHCPU, S/W version H
A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU (Manufactured in May, 1998)
S/W version Y
A2USCPU (S1)
S/W version E
A2USHCPU-S1
• Stores error code when M9061 is turned on

(communication with I/O modules or remote terminal
modules fails).
0: Normal
Communication • 1 .......Total number of stations of I/O modules or Usable with
D9061 1: Initial data error —
error code remote terminal modules or number of retries is A2C and A52G.
2: Line error
not normal. Initial program contains an error.
• 2 .......Cable breakage or power supply of I/O modules
or remote terminal modules is turned off.
APP - 27
APPENDICES

Stores the bit pattern of the base module in abnormal
condition.
When basic base module is abnormal: Bit 0 turns ON.
When 1st expansion base module is abnormal: Bit 1
Stores the bit pattern turns ON. Dedicated to
Abnormal base
D9068 of the abnormal base When 2nd expansion base module is abnormal: Bit 2 — QCPU-A
module
module turns ON. (A Mode)
:
:
When 7th expansion base module is abnormal: Bit 7
turns ON.
PC • In the loopback test mode of individual AJ71C24, the
Data check by Usable with all
D9072 communication AJ71C24 automatically executes data write/read and
AJ71C24 types of CPUs.
check communication check.
• Two digits showing the year (XX of 19XX) and month
are stored to D9073 in BCD codes, as shown below.
Clock data B15. . . . . B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
D9073 Clock data
(year, month) 1987,July
H8707
Year Month Dedicated to
A2CCPUC24
• Two digits showing the day and time are stored to (-PRF)
D9074 in BCD codes, as shown below.
Clock data B15. . . . . B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7. . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
D9074 Clock data —
(day, time) 31th,10
o'clock
Day Time H3110
• Two digits showing the minute and second are stored

to D9075 in BCD codes, as shown below.
Dedicated to
Clock data B15. . . . . B12 B11 . . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0 Example:
D9075 Clock data A2CCPUC24
(minute, second) 35 minutes,
(-PRF)
48 seconds
Minute Second H3548
Stores the status of writing to the built-in ROM.

0: Writing enabled
F1H: During RAM operation
Stores the status of Dedicated to
Result of writing F2H: Writing to built-in ROM disabled
D9075 writing to the built-in — QCPU-A
to built-in ROM F3H: Failed to erase
ROM (A Mode)
F4H: Failed to write
FEH: Checking erasing
FFH: During writing
• Two day of the week is stored to D9076 in BCD codes,
as shown below.
B15 . . . . B12 B11. . . . . . B8 B7 . . . . . . . B4 B3 . . . . . . . . B0
Dedicated to
Clock data These digits are always Day of the week
D9076 Clock data — A2CCPUC24
(day of the week) set to 0. 0 Sunday
1 Monday (-PRF)
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
Stores the status of writing (enabled/disabled) to the

Stores the status of built-in ROM.
Dedicated to
Status of writing writing (enabled/ Statuses of DIP switch 3 and M9073
D9076 — QCPU-A
to built-in ROM disabled) to the 0: SW3 is OFF, M9073 is OFF/ON
(A Mode)
built-in ROM 1: SW3 is ON, M9073 is OFF
2: SW3 is ON, M9073 is ON
APP - 28
APPENDICES

Sequence • Stores the accumulation time used by M9077.
Dedicated to
accumulation Accumulation time Setting range: 1 to 255ms (Default: 5ms)
D9077 — QCPU-A
time setting * When the value other than 1 to 255 ms is designated,
(A Mode)
measurement the value in D9077 is reset to 0.
Stores the number of remaining instructions ( RIRD /
RIWT / RISEND / RIRCV ) being executable simultaneously
at one scan.
(With QCUP-A or AnUCPU)
Number of remaining instructions being executable = 10
– Number of instructions executed simultaneously
(With AnSHCPU)
Number of remaining instructions being executable = 64
– Number of instructions executed simultaneously
*6: This function is available with the CPU of the following
S/W versions or later. Can be used
Number of Stores the number of
CPU Type Name Software Version only with AnU,
executable CC- remaining CC-Link
D9080 A2US, QCPU-A
Link dedicated dedicated instructions Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A, (A Mode) or
instructions being executable Q06HCPU-A AnSH *6
Available with all versions
A1SJHCPU, A1SHCPU,
A2SHCPU
A2UCPU (S1), A3UCPU, S/W version Q
A4UCPU (Manufactured in July, 1999)
S/W version E
A2USCPU (S1)
S/W version L
A2USHCPU-S1
Number of
Usable with
vacant • Stores the number of vacant registration areas for
AnA, A2AS,
registration communication requests executed to remote terminal
D9081 0 to 32 — QCPU-A (A
areas for modules connected to MINI (S3) link module, A2C and
Mode), AnU,
communication A52G.
A2C and A52G.
requests
Final • Stores the final station number of remote I/O modules
Final connected Usable with
D9082 connected and remote terminal modules connected to A2C and —
station number A2C and A52G.
station number A52G.
• Sets the time check time of the data link instructions
( ZNRD , ZNWR ) for the MELSECNET/10. Usable with
Time check • Setting range: 1 s to 65535 s (1 to 65535) AnU and A2AS,
D9085 1 s to 65535 s —
time • Setting unit: 1 s QCPU-A
• Default value: 10 s (If 0 has been set, default 10 s is (A Mode)
applied)
Microcomputer Unusable with
Depends on the
subroutine AnA, A2AS,
micro-computer • For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer
D9090 input data area QCPU-A (A
program package to program package.
head device Mode) and
be used.
number AnU.
Usable with
AnA, A2AS,
Instruction error detail
Instruction error • Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error. — QCPU-A
number
(A Mode),AnA
board and AnU.
D9091
Unusable with
Depends on the
Microcomputer AnA, A2AS,
micro-computer • For details, refer to the manual of each microcomputer
subroutine call QCPU-A
program package to program package.
error code (A Mode),AnA
be used.
board and AnU.
APP - 29
APPENDICES

Usable with
AnN*, AnA*,
Detail error number of
SFC program AnU, A2US(H),
the error which • Stores the detail error number of the error occurred in a
D9091 detail error — A2C, AOJ2H,
occurred in a SFC SFC program in a binary value.
number QCPU-A
program
(A Mode), AnS,
AnSH, A1FX.
• Stores upper 2 digits of the head I/O address of I/O
Changed I/O Unusable with
*2 *3 Changed I/O module modules to be loaded or unloaded during online mode
module head — AnN, A3V, AnA,
D9094 head address in BIN code.
address A73, AnU.
Example) Input module X2F0 H2F
• Monitors operation state of the A3VTS system and the
A3VCPU.
B15 B12 B8 B4 B0
D9095
CPU A CPU B CPU C

System operation state
Operation state
of the A3VTS Stores operation with Dedicated to
Data(H) Operation state Data(H) Operation state —
system and 4 hexadecimal digits. RUN RUN A3V.
A 0
A3VCPU
B STEP-RUN 1 STAND-BY
C PAUSE 2 STEP-RUN
D STOP 3 PAUSE
E ERROR 4 STOP
5 WAIT
D9095 6 ERROR
NO RIGHT OF
7 OPERATION
• Dip switch information of CPU module is stored as

follows.
0:ON
1:OFF
B15 to B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
D9095 0 Usable with
Dip switch
Dip switch information — QCPU-A
information SW1
(A mode) only.
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
• Error code of self-check error on CPU A is stored in
A3VCPU A Dedicated to
D9096 Self-check error code BIN code. —
Self-check error A3V.
• Cleared when D9008 of CPU A is cleared.
• Error code of self-check error on CPU B is stored in
A3VCPU B Dedicated to
• Cleared when D9008 of CPU B is cleared.
• Error code of self-check error on CPU C is stored in
A3VCPU C Dedicated to
• Cleared when D9008 of CPU C is cleared.
A3VTU • Error code of self-check error on A3VTU is stored in Dedicated to
D9099 Self-check error code —
Self-check error BIN code. A3V.
APP - 30
APPENDICES

*1 • Output module numbers (in units of 16 points), of which
D9100 fuses have blown, are entered in bit pattern. (Preset
output unit numbers when parameter setting has been
*1
performed.)
D9101
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
*1
1 0 0 0 (Y80)
D9100 0 0 0 (YC0) 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9102
*1 (Y1F0)
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9101 1 0 0 0 0 (Y1A)
D9103 1
D9107 0 0 0 0 BC
Y7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
Y7
30
0 0 0 Usable with all
*1 types of CPUs
D9104 Bit pattern in units of Indicates fuse blow. Only remote
Fuse blown
16 points of fuse blow I/O station
*1 module • Fuse blow check is executed also to the output module
modules information
D9105 of remote I/O station.
is valid for
*1 (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed.
A2C.
D9106 Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user
program.)
(For the AnU, A2US(H) and QCPU-A (A mode))
• Data clear of D9100 to D9107 is executed by turning
*1 off M9000 (fuse blown).
D9107 (For the CPU other than the AnU, A2US(H) and QCPU-
A (A mode))
• Data clear of D9100 to D9107 is executed by turning
off D9100 to D9107 (fuse blown).
• Stores the output module number of the fuses have
blown in the bit pattern.
b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9100 0 0
Indicates the module

0 is fixed. for setting switch 0.
for setting switch 1.
*1 Fuse blow Fuse blow module bit Dedicated to
—
D9100 module pattern Indicates the module
A0J2H.
Indicates the module for setting
switch 4 or the module for
extension base unit slot 0.
Indicates the module for setting switch 7 or
the module for extension base unit slot 3.
*2
D9108 • Sets value for the step transfer monitoring timer and
the number of F which turns on when the monitoring
*2
timer timed out.
D9109
b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Usable with AnN ,
*2 AnA, AnU, A2AS,
D9110
AnA board,
Step transfer Timer setting value
*2 Timer setting QCPU-A (A
monitoring and the F number at —
D9111 (1 to 255 sec Mode), A2C,
timer setting time out
in seconds) A0J2H, AnS,
*2
F number setting AnSH, A1FX and
D9112
(By turning on any of M9108 to M9114, the monitoring A52G.
*2
timer starts. If the transfer condition following a step
D9113
which corresponds to the timer is not established within
*2 set time, set annunciator (F) is tuned on.
D9114
APP - 31
APPENDICES

*1 • When I/O modules, of which data are different from
D9116 those entered at power-on, have been detected, the I/
*1 O unit numbers (in units of 16 points) are entered in bit
D9117 pattern. (Preset I/O unit numbers when parameter
setting has been performed.)
*1
D9118 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Usable with all
*1 D9116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 1
0
types of CPUs
D9119 Bit pattern in units of 1 Only remote
I/O module D9117 0 0 0 0 0 0 XY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
16 points of verify 180
I/O station
*1 verify error error units 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
D9123 0 7E0
XY information
D9120 is valid for
*1 Indicates I/O module verify error. A2C.
D9121 • I/O module verify check is executed also to remote I/O
*1 station modules.
D9122 (If normal status is restored, clear is not performed.
Therefore, it is required to perform clear by user
*1
program.)
D9123
• When an I/O module different from the I/O module data
registered during power-on is detected, this register
indicates the bit pattern of the I/O module number.
b15 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
D9116 0 0

0 is fixed. for setting switch 0.
I/O module Bit pattern of for setting switch 1.
*1 Dedicated to
verification verification error Indicates the module
—
D9116 for setting switch 2.
A0J2H.
error module Indicates the module
Indicates the module for setting switch 7 or
the module for extension base unit slot 3.
• When one of F0 to 255 (F0 to 2047 for AnA and AnU)

is turned on by SET F 1 is added to the contents of
D9124. When RST F or LEDR instruction is
executed, 1 is subtracted from the contents of D9124.
Annunciator
Annunciator (If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the Usable with all
D9124 detection
detection quantity CPU, pressing the switch can execute the same types of CPUs.
quantity
processing.)
• Quantity, which has been turned on by SET F is
stored into D9124 in BIN code. The quantity turned on
with SET F is stored up to "8."
APP - 32
APPENDICES

• When one of F0 to 255 (F0 to 2047 for AnA and AnU)
D9125 is turned on by SET F , F number, which has turned on,
is entered into D9125 to D9132 in due order in BIN
code.
F number, which has been turned off by RST F , is
D9126 erased from D9125 to D9132, and the contents of data
registers succeeding the data register, where the
erased F number was stored, are shifted to the
preceding data registers.
D9127 By executing LEDR instruction, the contents of D9125
to D9132 are shifted upward by one. (With a CPU
equipped with an INDICATOR RESET switch, the
same process occurs when the switch is pressed.
D9128 When there are 8 annunciator detections, the 9th one
is not stored into D9125 to 9132 even if detected.
Annunciator
Annunciator detection Usable with all
detection SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SET SET SET SET
number F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR types of CPUs
number
D9129 D9009 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
D9124 0 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8
D9125 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99
D9130
D9126 0 0 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15
D9127 0 0 0 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70
D9128 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 70 70 70 70 70 65
D9131
D9129 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 65 65 65 65 65 38
D9130 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 38 38 38 38 110
D9132 D9131 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 110 110 110 151
D9132 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210
• Stores information of I/O modules and remote terminal

D9133
modules connected to the A2C and A52G
corresponding to station number.
D9134 • Information of I/O modules and remote terminal
modules is for input, output and remote terminal
D9135 00: No I/O module or module identification and expressed as 2-bit data.
remote terminal 00: No I/O module or remote terminal module or
module or initial initial communication is impossible.
D9136 Remote communication 01: Input module or remote terminal module
Usable with
terminal card impossible 10: Output module
A2C and A52G
D9137 information 01: Input module or • Data configuration
remote terminal b15 b14b13 b12b11 b10b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
module D9133 8
Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
D9138 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
10: Output module Station Station Station Station Station Station Station Station
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
D9139 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
D9140 D9140
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57
APP - 33
APPENDICES

D9141
D9142
D9143
D9144
D9145
• Stores the number of retries executed to I/O modules
D9146 or remote terminal modules which caused
D9147 communication error.
(Retry processing is executed the number of times set
D9148
at D9174.)
D9149 • Data becomes 0 when communication is restored to
D9150 normal.
• Station number setting of I/O modules and remote
D9151 terminal modules is as shown below.
D9152 b15 to b8 b7 to b0
D9153 D9141 Station 2 Station 1
D9156 Number of
Usable with
times of retry Number of retries —
D9157 A2C and A52G.
execution D9171 Station 62 Station 61
D9159 • Retry counter uses 8 bits for one station.
D9160 b(n+7) b(n+6) b(n+5) b(n+4) b(n+3) b(n+2) b(n+1) b(n+0)
D9161 0/1
D9162
D9163 Number of retries
0: Normal
D9164
1: Station error
D9165
* "n" is determined by station number of I/O module or
D9166 remote terminal module.
D9167 Odd number stations: b0 to b7 (n = 0)
Even number stations: b8 to b15 (n = 8)
D9168
D9169
D9170
D9171
D9172
APP - 34
APPENDICES

Mode setting
0 Auto- • When an I/O module or a remote
matic terminal module caused communication
online error, the station is placed offline.
return • Communication with normal stations is
enabled continued.
• The station recovering from a
communication error automatically
resumes communication.
1 Auto- • When an I/O module or a remote
0: Automatic online
matic terminal module caused communication
return enabled
online error, the station is placed offline.
1: Automatic online
return • Communication with normal stations is
return disabled Usable with
D9173 Mode setting disabled continued. —
2: Transmission A2C and A52G.
• Though a faulty station returned to
stop at online
normal, communication is not restored
error
unless the station module is restarted.
3: Line check
2 Trans- • When an I/O module or a remote
mission terminal module caused communication
stop at error, communication with all stations is
online stopped.
error • Though a faulty station returned to
normal, communication is not restored
unless the station module is restarted.
3 Line • Checks hardware and connecting cables
check of I/O modules and remote terminal
modules.
• Sets the number of retries executed to I/O modules
and remote terminal modules which caused
communication error.
Setting of the • Set for 5 times at power on.
Usable with
D9174 number of Number of retries • Set range: 0 to 32 —
A2C and A52G.
retries • If communication with an I/O module or a remote
terminal module is not restored to normal after set
number of retries, such module is regarded as a faulty
station.
• Stores the number of retries executed at line error
(time out).
Line error retry Usable with
D9175 Number of retries • Data becomes 0 when line is restored to normal and —
counter A2C and A52G.
communication with I/O modules and remote terminal
modules is resumed.
D9180 • Stores error code of a faulty remote terminal module
D9181 when M9060 is turned on.
• The error code storage areas for each remote terminal
D9182 module are as shown below.
D9183 D9180 Remote terminal module No.1
Remote
D9184 D9181 Remote terminal module No.2 terminal
module
numbers
D9186 Remote
Remote terminal from 1 to 14 Usable with
...
terminal module are set with —

D9187 number A2C and A52G.
error number D9192 Remote terminal module No.13 D9020 to
D9034.
D9189
• Error code is cleared in the following cases.
D9190 • When the RUN key switch is moved from STOP to
D9191 RUN.
(D9180 to D9183 are all cleared.)
D9192 • When Yn4 of each remote terminal is set from OFF to
D9193 ON.
APP - 35
APPENDICES
Number Name Description Details

Limit switch
output state Dedicated to
D9180 —
storage areas • Stores output state of limit switch function. A73.
for axes 1 and 2
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Limit switch D9180 Y0F Y0E Y0D Y0C Y0B Y0A Y09 Y08 Y07 Y06 Y05 Y04 Y03 Y02 Y01 Y00
output state "1" is stored in Dedicated to

D9181 Axis 2 Axis 1
the bit which —
storage areas A73.
for axes 3 and 4 Bit pattern of limit D9181 Y1F Y1E Y1D Y1C Y1B Y1A Y19 Y18 Y17 Y16 Y15 Y14 Y13 Y12 Y11 Y10 corresponds to
output (Y) which
switch function output Axis 4 Axis 3 is turned on. "0"
Limit switch state is stored when
output state D9182 Y2F Y2E Y2D Y2C Y2B Y2A Y29 Y28 Y27 Y26 Y25 Y24 Y23 Y22 Y21 Y20 Dedicated to
D9182 output state is —
storage areas Axis 6 Axis 5 turned off. A73.
for axes 5 and 6
D9183 Y3F Y3E Y3D Y3C Y3B Y3A Y39 Y38 Y37 Y36 Y35 Y34 Y33 Y32 Y31 Y30
Limit switch
Axis 8 Axis 7
output state Dedicated to
D9183 —
storage areas A73.
for axes 7 and 8
• Stores error codes occurred at the PCPU in BIN code.
0 : Normal
1 : A73CPU hardware error
Cause of PCPU 2 : PCPU error Dedicated to
D9184 PCPU error code —
error 10: A70AF error A73.
11: A70AF error
12: A70MDF error
13: AY42 error
• Servo amplifier connection state is checked and the
result is stored in the bit which corresponds to each
axis number.
Connection state is continuously checked. Axes which
changed from disconnected state to connected state
Bit pattern of servo are regarded as connected. But, axes which changed
Servo amplifier from connected state to disconnected state are still Dedicated to
D9185 amplifier connection —
connection data regarded as connected. A73.
state
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
For For For For For For For For
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
All 0 Connected: 1
Disconnected: 0
APP - 36
APPENDICES

• Stores error code when the manual pulse generator
axis setting error flag (M9077) is turned on in the bit
each corresponds to each axis number.
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
For For For For For For For For For For For
axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis 0 0 0 0 0
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P3 P2 P1
"1" is stored in the bit (Not used) "1" is stored in

which corresponds to the the bit which
Manual pulse Manual pulse axis number which corresponds to Dedicated to
D9187 generator axis generator axis setting caused 1 pulse input the manual —
A73.
setting error error code magnification setting pulse generator
error. number which
0: Normal caused manual
1: Input magnification is pulse generator
out of the range from axis setting
1 to 100. error.
0: Normal
1: Axis setting
is out of the
range from
1 to 8.
• Stores axis number in the bit which corresponds to the

axis which was running when a test mode request was
given and test mode request error occurred.
Starting axis
b15 to b8 b7 to b0
number at test Dedicated to
D9188 Starting axis number For For For For For For For For —
mode request 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis A73.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
error
(Not used) "1" is stored when running.
"0" is stored when not running.
• Stores error servo program number (0 to 4095) when

Error program Dedicated to
D9189 Error program number the servo program setting error flag (M9079) is turned —
number A73.
on.
• Stores error code which corresponds to the error
Data setting Data setting error Dedicated to
D9190 setting item when the servo program setting error flag —
error number A73.
(M9079) is turned on.
• Stores type of connected servo amplifier in the bit
which corresponds to each axis number.
0: MR-SB/MR-SD/MR-SB-K is connected or not
connected.
Bit pattern of the axis 1: General-purpose servo amplifier is connected.
Servo amplifier connected to a Dedicated to
D9191 b15 to b8 b7 to b0 —
type general-purpose For For For For For For For For A73.
servo amplifier 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 axis axis axis axis axis axis axis axis
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
All 0 Type of servo amplifier

set at each axis is stored
with "0" or "1".
APP - 37
APPENDICES

• Bit which corresponds to faulty I/O module or remote
D9196 terminal module is set (1).
(Bit which corresponds to a faulty station is set when
normal communication cannot be restored after
executing the number of retries set at D9174.)
D9197 • If automatic online return is enabled, bit which
corresponds to a faulty station is reset (0) when the
Faulty station Bit pattern of the faulty station is restored to normal. Usable with
—
detection station • Data configuration A2C and A52G.
D9198 Address b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0
Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion Stasion
D9196 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
D9197 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
D9198 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33
D9199
D9199
64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
1: Error
0: Normal
POINT
(1) Special registers are cleared when the PC is switched off or the RESET
switch is set to LATCH CLEAR or RESET. Data remains unchanged when
the RUN/STOP key switch is set to STOP.
(2) The above special registers marked *1 above are latched and their data will
remain unchanged after normal status is restored. For this reason, use one
of the following methods to clear the registers.
(a) Method by user program

Clear execution
Insert the circuit shown at right into command
the program and turn on the clear RST D9005
execution command contact to clear Special function register to be cleared

the contents of register.
(b) Method by peripheral equipment
Set the register to "0" by changing the present value by the test function
of peripheral equipment or set to "0" by forced reset. For the operation
procedure, refer to the instruction manual for peripheral equipment.
(c) By moving the RESET key switch at the CPU front to the RESET
position, the special register is set to "0".
(3) Data is written to special registers marked *2 above in the sequence
program.
(4) Data is written to special registers marked *3 above in test mode of the
peripheral equipment.
APP - 38
APPENDIX
Appendix 3 Precautions when Replacing AnSCPU with AnSHCPU

Appendix 3.1 Differences between A1SHCPU and A1SCPU
The differences between the A1SHCPU and A1SCPU are as follows:
Item A1SHCPU A1SCPU
1 Operation processing speed *1 0.33 s 1 s
2 Number of I/O points 2048 points *2 256 points
3 File register capacity (R) MAX. 8192 points (R0 to 8191) MAX. 4096 points (R0 to 4095)
4 Memory capacity 64k bytes 32k bytes
5 Comment points MAX.3648 points MAX.1600 points*3
CC-Link dedicated
6 8 Not provided
instructions
7 Startup model A3 A1S
8 Memory write protection range First 32k bytes First 20k bytes
9 Microcomputer program There are some restrictions. There are no restrictions.
Conventional memory
cassette
10 A1SMCA-2KE/8KE/8KP
New-type memory cassette

A1SNMCA-2KE/8KE/8KP
Year, month, day, hour, minute, day of the week

11 Clock precision Precision Precision

-3.1 to +5.3s(TYP.+1.7s)/d at 0 -2.3 to +4.4s(TYP.+1.8s)/d at 0
-9.6 to +3.6s(TYP.-2.1s)/d at 55 -9.6 to +2.7s(TYP.-2.4s)/d at 55
*1 I/O processing: during refresh and LD instruction execution

*2 The number of the actual I/O points is the same as the AnS series, but this model has 2048
points of I/O device for each CPU (X/Y0 to X/Y7FF). The added I/O devices can be used for
MELSECNET (/B), MELSECNET/MINI, or CC-Link.
*3 The comment points for comments that can be stored in the CPU module is 1600 points,
while up to 3648 points of comment can be created using the GPP function.
App - 39
APPENDIX
Appendix 3.2 Differences between A2SHCPU(S1) and A2SCPU
The differences between the A2SHCPU(S1) and A2SCPU are as follows:
Item A2SHCPU(S1) A2SCPU
1 Operation processing speed*1 0.25 s 1 s
2 Number of I/O points 2048 points *2 512 points
3 File register capacity (R) MAX. 8192 points (R0 to 8191) MAX. 4096 points (R0 to 4095)
CC-Link dedicated
4 8 Not provided
instructions
5 Startup model A3 A2
6 Microcomputer program There are some restrictions. There are no restrictions.
Conventional memory
cassette
7 A2SMCA-14KE/14KP
New-type memory cassette

A2SNMCA-30KP
Year, month, day, hour, minute, day of the week

8 Clock precision Precision Precision

-9.6 to +3.6s(TYP.-2.1s)/d at 55 -1.1 to +4.4s(TYP.+2.2s)/d at 25
*1 I/O processing: during refresh and LD instruction execution

*2 The number of the actual I/O points is the same as the AnS series, but this model has 2048
points of I/O device for each CPU (X/Y0 to X/Y7FF).The added I/O devices can be used for
MELSECNET (/B), MELSECNET/MINI, or CC-Link.
Appendix 3.3 Replacement precautions
Appendix 3.3.1 PLC type setting
The PLC type must be set to "A3" to enable the use of 2048 I/O device (X/Y) points, 8192
file register (R) points, and LEAD/LEDB instructions.
Appendix 3.3.2 Precautions when performing ROM partition
When performing ROM partition for A1SJHCPU(S8) or A1SHCPU with the SW4GP-
GPPA, the startup model must be changed as follows.
Startup Model
Software version Q or earlier A0J2H
Software version R or later A1S
App - 40
APPENDIX
Appendix 3.3.3 Precautions when utilizing sequence programs
When applying parameters and programs created for AnSCPU to AnSHCPU, follow the
procedures below.
(1) Select "Read File" from the initial setting menu after starting up the GPP function
software package.
(2) Read the parameter and program files created for AnSCPU from the floppy or hard
disk, and then write those parameters and programs into a peripheral device.
(This file reading operation is required for performing the procedure described in 3.)
(3) Using the PLC type change item in the initial setting menu, change the CPU type
name to A3 that is for AnSHCPU.
(Perform the procedure as given in 4, since the parameter is reset to the default.)
(4) Select the file maintenance menu to read the parameters and programs created for
AnSCPU from the floppy or hard disk into the peripheral device.
(Ignore the error message 'Unmatched PLC Type' even if such a message appers.)
The above procedures allow parameters and programs for AnSCPU to be used for
AnSHCPU without any change or modification.
Appendix 3.3.4 Checking the influence of the increased instruction processing speed on the system
Confirm the influences of the increased instruction processing speed and reduced scan
time on the user system.
App - 41
APPENDIX
Appendix 3.3.5 Handling conventional memory cassettes
Conventional memory cassettes A1SMCA-2KE/8KE/8KP (for A1SCPU) and A2SMCA-

14KE (for A2SCPU) cannot be used for A1SHCPU and A2SHCPU(S1).
(Used only for A1SJHCPU(S8).)
The new type memory cassettes A1SNMCA-2KE/8KE/8KP (for A1SJHCPU(S8)/
A1SHCPU) and A2SNMCA-30KE (for A2SHCPU(S1)) should be used.
Appendix 3.3.6 Replacing the A2SMCA-14KP (when A2SCPU + A2SMCA-14KP has been used)
When replacing the above with A2SHCPU + A2SNMCA-30KE, the area *1 cannot be used
for the extension file register.
When the area *1 has been used as the extension file register are, the system of
A2ASCPU(-S1) + A2SMCA-14KP should be used.
2
(a) In RAM operation (b) In E PROM operation
Parameter area
T/C set values area
ROM memory capacity Sequence program area
Not usable
(Max. 64k bytes) (required min. 1k step)
Microcomputer program area
Writing to
ROM Unused
3k bytes Parameter area
1k byte T/C set values area *1
Sequence program area Not usable
Memory write 1 to 14k steps (used by system)
(required min. 1k step)
protect range (2 to 28k bytes)
Microcomputer program area
(32k bytes)
Unused Unused
Built-in RAM
memory area
Extension file Extension file Usable with
register area register area
(64k bytes) SW0GHPULTP-FN1.
Sampling trace area Sampling trace area
Status latch area Status latch area
File register area File register area
Comment area Comment area
Appendix 3.3.7 Restrictions on microcomputer programs
When using the microcomputer mode, the following changes are made in the
microcomputer instructions.
Changes by Replacing AnSCPU with AnSHCPU Corrective Action
When REP LODSW and REP LODSB instructions are used Refer to the following program example.
AnSCPU ...... The contents of the memory specified by the SI register are
Program example
transfered to the register of AL (8-bit operation) or AX (16-bit
operation) for the number of times specified in the CX register.
After the instructions are executed, the CX register value
becomes 0.
AnSHCPU.... The contents of the memory specified by the SI register are STD STD
transfered to the register of AL (8-bit operation) or AX (16-bit MOV CX.3 MOV CX.3
operation) only once regardless of the value of the CX register. REP LODSB A: LODSB
After the instructions are executed, the CX register value does Loop A
not change.
App - 42
APPENDIX
Appendix 4 External Dimensions

Appendix 4.1 CPU module
Appendix 4.1.1 A1SHCPU, A2SHCPU(S1) module
Unit : mm (inch)
Appendix 4.1.2 A1SJHCPU module
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 43
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.1.3 A1SJHCPU-S8 module
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 44
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.2 A1S61PN, A1S62PN and A1S63P power supply modules
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 45
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.3 Main base unit
Appendix 4.3.1 A1S32B main base unit
Unit : mm (inch)
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 46
APPENDIX
Unit : mm (inch)
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 47
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.4 Extension base unit
Appendix 4.4.1 A1S65B extension base unit
Unit : mm (inch)
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 48
APPENDIX
Unit : mm (inch)
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 49
APPENDIX
Unit : mm (inch)
Appendix 4.4.6 A1S65B-S1 extension base unit
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 50
APPENDIX
Unit : mm (inch)
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 51
APPENDIX
Unit : mm (inch)
Appendix 4.4.10A1S58B-S1 extension base unit
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 52
APPENDIX
Appendix 4.5 Memory cassette
Appendix 4.5.1 AnSNMCA-[ ] memory cassette
Unit : mm (inch)
Appendix 4.6 Memory write adapter
Appendix 4.6.1 A6WA-28P memory write adapter
A6WA
28P
45.7(1.80)
CON1
CON2
22.96(0.90) 18(0.71)
Unit : mm (inch)
App - 53
APPENDIX
Appendix5 Transportation Precautions

When transporting lithium batteries, make sure to handle them based on the
transportation regulations.
Appendix5.1 Relevant models
The batteries used for CPU modules are classified as follows:
Product Name Model Name Description Handling Category
A series battery A6BAT Lithium battery Non-dangerous goods
App - 54
APPENDIX
Appendix5.2 Transportation Guidelines
Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to
shipment. When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another
location, make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Code and
other local transportation regulations.
For details, please consult your transportation company.
App - 55
APPENDIX
Appendix6 Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built-in Batteries in EU Countries

This section describes the precautions for disposing of used batteries in EU countries and
exporting batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries to EU countries.
Appendix6.1 Disposal precautions
In EU countries, there is a separate collection system for used batteries. Dispose of

batteries properly at the local community waste collection/recycling center.
The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices
with built-in batteries used for Mitsubishi programmable controllers.
Symbol mark
Note: This symbol mark is for EU countries only.

The symbol mark is specified in the EU directive 2006/66/EC Article 20
A gInformation for end usersAh and Annex II.
The symbol mark indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other
wastes.
App - 56
APPENDIX
Appendix6.2 Exportation precautions
In accordance with the enforcement of the new EU Battery Directive (2006/66/EC), the
following must be required when marketing or exporting batteries and/or devices with
builtin batteries to EU coutries.
• To print the symbol mark on batteries, devices, or their packaging
• To explain the symbol mark in the manuals of the products
(1) Printing the symbol mark

To market or export batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries, which have no
symbol, to EU member states on September 26, 2008 or later, print the symbol
shownon the previous page on the batteries, devices, or their packaging.
(2) Explaining the symbol mark in the manuals

To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi programmable controller to EU countries
on September 26, 2008 or later, provide the latest manuals that include the
explanation of the symbol mark.
If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol
mark are provided, separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol mark
to each manual of the devices.
POINT
The requirements apply to batteries and/or devices with built-in batteries
manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive.
App - 57
INDEX
[A] Data register [D].............................................4-2
Accumulator [A] ................................................ 4-2 File register [R] ..............................................4-2
Allowable period of momentary power failure... 4-3 Index register [V, Z] .......................................4-2
Annunciator [F] ................................................. 4-2 Internal relay [M] ............................................4-2
Application standards of extension base modules Interrupt pointer [I] .........................................4-2
.......................................................................... 6-3 Latch relay [L] ................................................4-2
Link register [W].............................................4-2
[B] Link relay [B] ..................................................4-2
Base Unit Pointer [P] ......................................................4-2
External Dimensions of Base Unit .......... App-46 Special register [D] ........................................4-2
Installation and Removal of the Base Units Special relay [M] ............................................4-2
.................................................................... 8-11 Step relay [S] .................................................4-2
Installing the Base Units ............................... 8-9 Timer [T] ........................................................4-2
Base unit Device list ........................................................4-13
Parts names.................................................. 6-7 Device points.....................................................4-2
Battery
Battery installation......................................... 7-8 [E]
Battery Replacement .................................. 10-4 EMC DIRECTIVES............................................9-1
Replacement procedure.............................. 10-8 END processing ................................................4-4
Service life .................................................. 10-4 Error Code List ..............................................11-11
Standard replacement timing ...................... 10-7 EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS
CPU module ........................................... App-43
[C] External Dimensions
Calculation of Heat Amount.............................. 8-7 Extension Base Unit ............................... App-48
Category II ...................................................... 9-11 Main Base Unit ....................................... App-46
Circuit Memory cassette model.......................... App-53
Fail-Safe Circuit ...................................... 8-4,8-5 Power supply module ............................. App-45
System design circuit example ..................... 8-3 External dimensions ..........................................4-3
Clock function ................................................... 4-3
Constant scan................................................... 4-1 [F]
Control method ................................................. 4-1 Fail-Safe
Counter [C] ....................................................... 4-2 Fail-Safe Circuit .............................................8-4
CPU module Fail-safe measures ........................................8-4
EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS ..................... App-43 Fault Examples with I/O Modules..................11-17
Installation and Removal............................. 8-11 Faults in the output circuit .............................11-19
Performance specifications........................... 4-1 Faults with the input circuit and the corrective
Current Consumption ....................................... 4-3 actions ...........................................................11-17
Features ............................................................1-2
[D] Ferrite core ........................................................9-8
Dairy Inspection.............................................. 10-2 File register [R] ..................................................4-2
Data register [D] ............................................... 4-2 Function List ....................................................4-19
Device Fundamentals of Troubleshooting...................11-1
Accumulator [A]............................................. 4-2
Annunciator [F].............................................. 4-2 [H]
Counter [C].................................................... 4-2 Hardware...........................................................2-5
Index - 1
[I] Precautions when Connecting the Uninterruptible
Index register [V, Z] .......................................... 4-2 Power Supply...............................................8-23
Initial processing............................................... 4-4 Precautions when installing PC .....................8-9
Installation and Removal of the Dustproof Cover Precautions when using the MELSEC-AnS series
........................................................................ 8-14 PLC..............................................................9-10
Installation Environment ................................... 8-6 Transportation Precautions..................... App-54
Instantaneous power failure ............................. 4-9 Wiring instructions .......................................8-16
INSTRUCTION LIST .................................... App-1 Number of I/O device points..............................4-1
Intensive insulation ......................................... 9-13 Number of I/O points .........................................4-1
Internal current consumption ............................ 4-3
Internal relay [M]............................................... 4-2 [O]
Interrupt pointer [I] ............................................ 4-2 Overall Configuration ........................................2-1
I/O control mode ............................................... 4-1 Overview of operation processing .....................4-4
[L] [P]
Latch clear operation ...................................... 4-29 Parameter setting
Latch relay [L] ................................................... 4-2 List of parameter setting range ....................4-15
Latch (power failure compensation) range ....... 4-3 Parameter Setting Ranges ..........................4-15
LED Part Names
Name of the LED .................................. 4-24,5-5 Parts names............................................ 5-5,6-7
"ERROR" LED is flickering.......................... 11-7 Parts names and setting ..............................4-22
"ERROR" LED is turned ON ....................... 11-6 PAUSE status ...................................................4-7
"POWER" LED is turned OFF ..................... 11-3 Periodic inspection ..........................................10-3
"RUN" LED is flickering ............................... 11-5 Pointer [P] .........................................................4-2
"RUN" LED is turned OFF........................... 11-4 Power supply module
Link register [W]................................................ 4-2 External Dimensions............................... App-45
Link relay [B]..................................................... 4-2 Parts names...................................................5-5
LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES................. 9-1,9-10 Power supply module selection .....................5-4
Precautions
[M] DESIGN PRECAUTIONS ............................. A-1
Maximum number of extension stages DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS......................... A-7
................................................................ 2-27,2-29 Memory cassette handling precautions .........7-2
Memory capacity ...................................... 4-1,4-17 Precautions When Configuring the System
Memory Cassette .......................................................................2-5
Specifications of the memory cassette ......... 7-1 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE
Memory cassette PRECAUTIONS............................................ A-5
Installation and removal of memory cassette USER PRECAUTONS................................ A-15
...................................................................... 7-3 Procedure to read an error code ...................11-11
Memory cassette handling precautions ........ 7-2 Processing speed..............................................4-1
Module Program capacity ..............................................4-1
Installation................................................... 8-12 Programming language .....................................4-1
Removal...................................................... 8-13
[R]
[N] Relevant Models ........................................ App-54
Noise filter......................................................... 9-9 Remote RUN/PAUSE contacts .........................4-3
Notes Retentive timer ..................................................4-2
Battery handling precautions ........................ 7-7 RUN status ........................................................4-7
CPU module handling precautions ............. 4-21
Precautions for using coaxial cables............. 9-4
Index - 2
[S] Wiring
Self-diagnostics function................................. 4-10 Wiring I/O equipments .................................8-19
Settings for memory protect switch ................ 4-27 Wiring to the module terminals ....................8-21
Settings for memory protection switch.............. 7-6 Wiring I/O equipments.....................................8-19
Software package............................................. 2-9 Wiring to the module terminals........................8-21
Special register [D] ........................................... 4-2
Special relay [M] ............................................... 4-2 Numerics
Specifications 5VDC internal current consumption ..................4-3
Battery specifications .................................... 7-7
Extension cable specifications ...................... 6-2
Performance specifications........................... 4-1
SPECIFICATIONS ........................................ 3-1
Specifications of the memory cassette ......... 7-1
Standard
EMC DIRECTIVES ....................................... 9-1
LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES ............. 9-1,9-10
Step relay [S] .................................................... 4-2
STOP status ..................................................... 4-7
Surge absorber for lightening ......................... 8-18
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Precautions When Configuring the System
...................................................................... 2-5
System Configuration Overview.................. 2-26
System Equipment ......................................... 2-11
[T]
Timer [T] ........................................................... 4-2
Troubleshooting flowchart
Flow for actions when the output module's output
load does not turn ON................................. 11-8
Flow for actions when the program cannot be
written ......................................................... 11-9
Flow for actions when the "ERROR" LED is
flickering...................................................... 11-7
Flow for actions when the "ERROR" LED is
turned ON ................................................... 11-6
Flow for actions when the "POWER" LED is
turned OFF.................................................. 11-3
Flow for actions when the "RUN" LED is flickering
.................................................................... 11-5
Flow for actions when the "RUN" LED is turned
OFF............................................................. 11-4
[W]
Weight
CPU module.................................................. 4-3
Extension cable............................................. 6-2
Memory cassette........................................... 7-1
Index - 3
Warranty
Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product.
1. Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range
If any faults or defects (hereinafter "Failure") found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the
product within the gratis warranty term, the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or
Mitsubishi Service Company.
However, if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location, expenses to send an engineer will be
solely at the customer's discretion. Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re-commissioning,
maintenance, or testing on-site that involves replacement of the failed module.
[Gratis Warranty Term]
The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated
place.
Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi, the maximum distribution period shall be six (6) months,
and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen (18) months. The gratis warranty term of
repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs.
[Gratis Warranty Range]
(1) The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state, usage methods and usage environment, etc.,
which follow the conditions and precautions, etc., given in the instruction manual, user's manual and caution
labels on the product.
(2) Even within the gratis warranty term, repairs shall be charged for in the following cases.
1. Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling, carelessness or negligence by the user. Failure
caused by the user's hardware or software design.
2. Failure caused by unapproved modifications, etc., to the product by the user.
3. When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user's device, Failure that could have been avoided if
functions or structures, judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user's device is subject to or
as necessary by industry standards, had been provided.
4. Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts (battery, backlight, fuse, etc.) designated in the
instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced.
5. Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages, and Failure caused by force
majeure such as earthquakes, lightning, wind and water damage.
6. Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from
Mitsubishi.
7. Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user.
2. Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production
(1) Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven (7) years after production of the product is
discontinued.
Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins, etc.
(2) Product supply (including repair parts) is not available after production is discontinued.
3. Overseas service
Overseas, repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi's local overseas FA Center. Note that the repair conditions at
each FA Center may differ.
4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability
Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any
cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi, loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures
of Mitsubishi products, special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not , compensation for
accidents, and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products, replacement by the user,
maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.
5. Changes in product specifications
The specifications given in the catalogs, manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice.
6. Product application
(1) In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable controller, the usage conditions shall be that the application will
not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable controller device,
and that backup and fail-safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or
fault.
(2) The Mitsubishi programmable controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general
industries, etc. Thus, applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and
other power plants operated by respective power companies, and applications in which a special quality
assurance system is required, such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded
from the programmable controller applications.
In addition, applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected, such as in aircraft,
medical applications, incineration and fuel devices, manned transportation, equipment for recreation and
amusement, and safety devices, shall also be excluded from the programmable controller range of
applications.
However, in certain cases, some applications may be possible, providing the user consults their local
Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project, and providing that all parties
concerned agree to the special circumstances, solely at the users discretion.
IB(NA)-66779-K

A 1 Sjhs 8

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

A 1 Sjhs 8

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A 1 Sjhs 8

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(Be sure to read these instructions before use.)

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions, resulting in

When controlling a running programmable controller (data modification) by connecting a peripheral

Do not connect multiple power supply modules to one module in parallel.

Tighten terminal screws within the specified torque range.

Install our programmable controller in a control panel for use.

Properly connect batteries.

Do not disassemble or modify each of modules.

Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery.

Japanese Manual Version SH-3635-L

1997 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 - 1 to 5 - 6

7 MEMORY CASSETTE AND BATTERY 7 - 1 to 7 - 8

8 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 8 - 1 to 8 - 23

9 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 9 - 1 to 9 - 13

10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 - 1 to 10 - 8

APPENDIX Appendix - 1 to Appendix - 57

INDEX Index - 1 to Index - 3

The following manuals are related to this product.

Precautions when using the AnS series

Precautions for battery

(2) The operation after excess of a battery life

A1SHCPU and A1SJHCPU are grouped as A1SHCPU, unless there is necessity to

The AnSHCPU is a compact-type building block programmable controller. The model is

A6GPP, A6PHP, PC/AT (started up with SW IVD-GPPA)

(1) High-speed operation processing speed

Operation processing speed *1 0.33 s 0.25 s 1 s

*1 I/O processing: Refresh and LD instruction

(2) Addition of new dedicated instructions

(3) Increased number of I/O device points

(4) Increased file register R capacity

(5) Increased memory capacity (Increased number of comment points)

(6) Full compatibility with A1S(S1)/A2SCPU(S1)

(7) Compact size

(8) Max. 8 k/14 k steps of program

(9) SFC language compatible

(11) Use either screws or DIN rail for panel installations

(12) Easy-to-see terminal block symbol sheet

(13) A N, A A-series I/O module and special function module compatible

(14) Same programming environment as other MELSEC-A CPU modules

2.1 Overall Configuration

2.1.1 Overall configuration of AnSHCPU

The following figure shows configurations of an AnSHCPU stand-alone system and a

ROM cassette A1SHCPU A2SHCPU(S1) ROM cassette

Main base(A1S3 B) Power supply module

Extension cable (A1SC0 NB) Extension cable (A1SC NB)

Power supply module Extension base Extension base

To CPU module AC30R4

EP-ROM write adapter ROM cassette

EP-ROM write adapter ROM cassette

RS-232C RS-422 IBM-PC/AT-compatible

2.1.2 Overall configuration of A1SJHCPU(S8)

The following figure shows configurations of a A1SJHCPU(S8) stand-alone system and

(To peripheral device)

Thin type I/O module (A1SJ-56 )